mirror of
https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject.git
synced 2024-12-26 21:30:55 +08:00
martin qi
commit
476c0b8763
164
published/20150407 10 Truly Amusing Easter Eggs in Linux.md
Normal file
164
published/20150407 10 Truly Amusing Easter Eggs in Linux.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
|
||||
十个非常有趣的 Linux 彩蛋
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
*制作 Adventure 的程序员悄悄的把一个秘密的功能塞进了游戏里。Atari 并没有对此感到生气，而是给这类“秘密功能”起了个名字——“彩蛋”，因为——你懂的——你会像找复活节彩蛋一样寻找它们。*
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*图片来自： Wikipedia*
|
||||
|
||||
在1979年的时候，公司为 Atari 2600 开发了一个电子游戏——[Adventure][1]。
|
||||
|
||||
制作 Adventure 的程序员悄悄的把这样的一个功能放进了游戏里，当用户把一个“隐形方块”移动到特定的一面墙上时，会让用户进入一个“密室”。那个房间里只有一句话：“Created by [Warren Robinett][2]”——意思是，由 [Warren Robinett][2] 创建。
|
||||
|
||||
Atari 有一项反对作者将自己的名字放进他们的游戏里的政策，所以这个无畏的程序员只能偷偷的把自己的名字放进游戏里。Atari 在 Warren Robinett 离开公司之后才发现这个“密室”。Atari 并没有对此感到生气，而是给这类“秘密功能”起了个名字——“彩蛋”，因为——你懂的——你会寻找它们。Atari 还宣布将在之后的游戏中加入更多的“彩蛋”。
|
||||
|
||||
这种软件里的“隐藏功能”并不是第一次出现（这类特性的首次出现是在1966年[PDP-10][3]的操作系统上），但这是它第一次有了名字，同时也是第一次真正的被众多电脑用户和游戏玩家所注意。
|
||||
|
||||
Linux（以及和Linux相关的软件）也没有被遗忘。这些年来，人们为这个倍受喜爱的操作系统创作了很多非常有趣的彩蛋。下面将介绍我个人最喜爱的彩蛋——以及如何找到它们。
|
||||
|
||||
你很快就会想到这些彩蛋大多需要通过终端才能体验到。这是故意的。因为终端比较酷。【我应该借此机机会提醒你一下，如果你想运行我所列出的应用，然而你却还没有安装它们，你是绝对无法运行成功的。你应该先安装好它们的。因为……毕竟只是计算机。】
|
||||
|
||||
### Arch : 包管理器（pacman）里的吃豆人（Pac-Man） ###
|
||||
|
||||
为了广大的 [Arch Linux][4] 粉丝，我们将以此开篇。你们可以将“[pacman][6]” (Arch 的包管理器)的进度条变成吃豆人吃豆的样子。别问我为什么这不是默认设置。
|
||||
|
||||
你需要在你最喜欢的文本编辑器里编辑“/etc/pacman.conf”文件。在“# Misc options”区下面，删除“Color”前的“#”，添加一行“ILoveCandy”。因为吃豆人喜欢糖豆。
|
||||
|
||||
没错，这样就行了！下次你在终端里运行pacman管理器时，你就会让这个黄颜色的小家伙吃到些午餐（至少能吃些糖豆）。
|
||||
|
||||
### GNU Emacs : 俄罗斯方块（Tetris）以及…… ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*我不喜欢 emacs。一点也不喜欢。但是它确实能玩俄罗斯方块。*
|
||||
|
||||
我要坦白一件事：我不喜欢[emacs][7]。一点也不喜欢。
|
||||
|
||||
有些东西让我满心欢喜。有些东西能带走我所有伤痛。有些东西能解决我的烦恼。这些[绝对跟 emacs 无关][8]。
|
||||
|
||||
但是它确实能玩俄罗斯方块。这可不是件小事。方法如下：
|
||||
|
||||
第一步）打开 emacs。（有疑问？输入“emacs”。）
|
||||
|
||||
第二步）按下键盘上的Esc和X键。
|
||||
|
||||
第三步）输入“tetris”然后按下“Enter”。
|
||||
|
||||
玩腻了俄罗斯方块？试试“pong”、“snake”还有其他一堆小游戏（或奇怪的东西）。在“/usr/share/emacs/*/lisp/play”文件中可以看见完整的清单。
|
||||
|
||||
### 动物说话了 ###
|
||||
|
||||
让动物在终端里说话在 Linux 世界里有着悠久而辉煌的历史。下面这些真的是最应该知道的。
|
||||
|
||||
在用基于 Debian 的发行版？试试输入“apt-get moo"。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*apt-get moo*
|
||||
|
||||
简单？的确。但这是只会说话的牛，所以惹我们喜欢。再试试“aptitude moo”。他会告诉你“There are no Easter Eggs in this program（这个程序里没有彩蛋）”。
|
||||
|
||||
关于 [aptitude][9] 有一件事你一定要知道，它是个肮脏、下流的骗子。如果 aptitude 是匹诺曹，那它的鼻子能刺穿月球。在这条命令中添加“-v”选项。不停的添加 v，直到它被逼得投降。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*我猜大家都同意，这是 aptitude 中最重要的功能。*
|
||||
|
||||
我猜大家都同意，这是 aptitude 中最重要的功能。但是万一你想把自己的话让一头牛说出来怎么办？这时我们就需要“cowsay”了。
|
||||
|
||||
还有，别让“cowsay（牛说）”这个名字把你给骗了。你可以让你的话从各种东西的嘴里说出来。比如一头大象，Calvin，Beavis 甚至可以是 Ghostbusters（捉鬼敢死队）的标志。只需在终端输入“cowsay -l”就能看到所有选项的列表。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*你可以让你的话从各种东西的嘴里说出来*
|
||||
|
||||
想玩高端点的？你可以用管道把其他应用的输出放到 cowsay 中。试试“fortune | cowsay”。非常有趣。
|
||||
|
||||
### Sudo 请无情的侮辱我 ###
|
||||
|
||||
当你做错事时希望你的电脑骂你的人请举手。反正，我这样想过。试试这个：
|
||||
|
||||
输入“sudo visudo”以打开“sudoers”文件。在文件的开头你很可能会看见几行以“Defaults”开头的文字。在那几行后面添加“Defaults insults”并保存文件。
|
||||
|
||||
现在，只要你输错了你的 sudo 密码，你的系统就会骂你。这些可以提高自信的语句包括“听着，煎饼脑袋，我可没时间听这些垃圾。”，“你吃错药了吧？”以及“你被电过以后大脑就跟以前不太一样了是不是？”
|
||||
|
||||
把这个设在同事的电脑上会有非常有趣。
|
||||
|
||||
### Firefox 是个厚脸皮 ###
|
||||
|
||||
这一个不需要终端！太棒了！
|
||||
|
||||
打开火狐浏览器。在地址栏填上“about:about”。你将得到火狐浏览器中所有的“about”页。一点也不炫酷，是不是？
|
||||
|
||||
现在试试“about:mozilla”，浏览器就会回应你一条从“[Book of Mozilla（Mozilla 之书）][10]”——这本浏览网页的圣经——里引用的话。我的另一个最爱是“about:robots”，这个也很有趣。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*“[Book of Mozilla（Mozilla 之书）][10]”——浏览网页的圣经。*
|
||||
|
||||
### 精心调制的混搭日历 ###
|
||||
|
||||
是否厌倦了千百年不变的 [Gregorian Calendar（罗马教历）][11]？准备好乱入了吗？试试输入“ddate”。这样会把当前日历以[Discordian Calendar（不和教历）][12]的方式显示出来。你会遇见这样的语句：
|
||||
|
||||
“今天是Sweetmorn（甜美的清晨），3181年Discord（不和）季的第18天。”
|
||||
|
||||
我听见你在说什么了，“但这根本不是什么彩蛋！”嘘~，闭嘴。只要我想，我就可以把它叫做彩蛋。
|
||||
|
||||
### 快速进入黑客行话模式 ###
|
||||
|
||||
想不想尝试一下电影里超级黑客的感觉？试试（通过添加“-oS”）把扫描器设置成“[Script Kiddie][13]”模式。然后所有的输出都会变成最3l33t的[黑客范][14]。
|
||||
|
||||
例如: “nmap -oS - google.com”
|
||||
|
||||
赶快试试。我知道你有多想这么做。你一定会让安吉丽娜·朱莉（Angelina Jolie）[印象深刻][15]
|
||||
|
||||
### lolcat彩虹 ###
|
||||
|
||||
在你的Linux终端里有很多彩蛋真真是极好的……但是如果你还想要变得……更有魅力些怎么办？输入：lolcat。把任何一个程序的文本输出通过管道输入到lolcat里。你会得到它的超级无敌彩虹版。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*把任何一个程序的文本输出通过管道输入到lolcat里。你会得到它的超级无敌彩虹版。*
|
||||
|
||||
### 追光标的小家伙 ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*“Oneko” -- 经典 “Neko”的Linux移植版本。*
|
||||
|
||||
接下来是“Oneko” -- 经典 “[Neko][16]”的Linux移植版本。基本上就是个满屏幕追着你的光标跑的小猫。
|
||||
|
||||
虽然严格来它并不算是“彩蛋”，它还是很有趣的。而且感觉上也是很彩蛋的。
|
||||
|
||||
你还可以用不同的选项（比如“oneko -dog”）把小猫替代成小狗，或是调成其他样式。用这个对付讨厌的同事有着无限的可能。
|
||||
|
||||
就是这些了！一个我最喜欢的Linux彩蛋（或是类似东西）的清单。请尽情的的在下面的评论区留下你的最爱。因为这是互联网。你就能做这些事。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.linux.com/news/software/applications/820944-10-truly-amusing-linux-easter-eggs-
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Bryan Lunduke][a]
|
||||
译者：[H-mudcup](https://github.com/H-mudcup)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](http://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.linux.com/community/forums/person/56734
|
||||
[1]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adventure_(Atari_2600)
|
||||
[2]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Warren_Robinett
|
||||
[3]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PDP-10
|
||||
[4]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arch_Linux
|
||||
[5]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pac-Man
|
||||
[6]:http://www.linux.com/news/software/applications/820944-10-truly-amusing-linux-easter-eggs-#Pacman
|
||||
[7]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GNU_Emacs
|
||||
[8]:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AQ4NAZPi2js
|
||||
[9]:https://wiki.debian.org/Aptitude
|
||||
[10]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Book_of_Mozilla
|
||||
[11]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gregorian_calendar
|
||||
[12]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Discordian_calendar
|
||||
[13]:http://nmap.org/book/output-formats-script-kiddie.html
|
||||
[14]:http://nmap.org/book/output-formats-script-kiddie.html
|
||||
[15]:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ql1uLyuWra8
|
||||
[16]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neko_%28computer_program%29
|
||||
@ -1,26 +1,26 @@
|
||||
Lolcat – 一个在 Linux 终端中输出彩虹特效的命令行工具
|
||||
Lolcat ：一个在 Linux 终端中输出彩虹特效的命令行工具
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
那些相信 Linux 命令行是单调无聊且没有任何乐趣的人们，你们错了，这里有一些有关 Linux 的文章,它们展示着 Linux 是如何的有趣和“淘气” 。
|
||||
|
||||
- [20 个有趣的 Linux 命令或在终端中 Linux 是有趣的][1]
|
||||
- [6 个有趣的好玩 Linux 命令(在终端中的乐趣)][2]
|
||||
- [在 Linux 终端中的乐趣 – 把玩文字和字符计数][3]
|
||||
- [Linux命令及Linux终端的20个趣事][1]
|
||||
- [终端中的乐趣：6个有趣的Linux命令行工具][2]
|
||||
- [Linux终端的乐趣之把玩字词计数][3]
|
||||
|
||||
在本文中，我将讨论一个名为“lolcat”的应用 – 它在终端中生成彩虹般的颜色。
|
||||
在本文中，我将讨论一个名为“lolcat”的小工具 – 它可以在终端中生成彩虹般的颜色。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
为终端生成彩虹般颜色的输出的 Lolcat 命令
|
||||
*为终端生成彩虹般颜色的输出的 Lolcat 命令*
|
||||
|
||||
#### 何为 lolcat ? ####
|
||||
|
||||
Lolcat 是一个针对 Linux，BSD 和 OSX 平台的应用，它类似于 [cat 命令][4]，并为 `cat` 的输出添加彩虹般的色彩。 Lolcat 原本用于在 Linux 终端中为文本添加彩虹般的色彩。
|
||||
Lolcat 是一个针对 Linux，BSD 和 OSX 平台的工具，它类似于 [cat 命令][4]，并为 `cat` 的输出添加彩虹般的色彩。 Lolcat 主要用于在 Linux 终端中为文本添加彩虹般的色彩。
|
||||
|
||||
### 在 Linux 中安装 Lolcat ###
|
||||
|
||||
**1. Lolcat 应用在许多 Linux 发行版本的软件仓库中都可获取到，但可获得的版本都有些陈旧，而你可以通过 git 仓库下载和安装最新版本的 lolcat。**
|
||||
**1. Lolcat 工具在许多 Linux 发行版的软件仓库中都可获取到，但可获得的版本都有些陈旧，而你可以通过 git 仓库下载和安装最新版本的 lolcat。**
|
||||
|
||||
由于 Lolcat 是一个 ruby gem 程序，所以在你的系统中安装有最新版本的 RUBY 是必须的。
|
||||
由于 Lolcat 是一个 ruby gem 程序，所以在你的系统中必须安装有最新版本的 RUBY。
|
||||
|
||||
# apt-get install ruby [在基于 APT 的系统中]
|
||||
# yum install ruby [在基于 Yum 的系统中]
|
||||
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Lolcat 是一个针对 Linux，BSD 和 OSX 平台的应用，它类似于 [cat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Lolcat 的帮助文档
|
||||
*Lolcat 的帮助文档*
|
||||
|
||||
**4. 接着, 通过管道连接 lolcat 和其他命令，例如 ps, date 和 cal:**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -63,15 +63,15 @@ Lolcat 的帮助文档
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ps 命令的输出
|
||||
*ps 命令的输出*
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Date 的输出
|
||||
*Date 的输出*
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Calendar 的输出
|
||||
*Calendar 的输出*
|
||||
|
||||
**5. 使用 lolcat 来展示一个脚本文件的代码:**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -79,18 +79,18 @@ Calendar 的输出
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
用 lolcat 来展示代码
|
||||
*用 lolcat 来展示代码*
|
||||
|
||||
**6. 通过管道连接 lolcat 和 figlet 命令。Figlet 是一个展示由常规的屏幕字符组成的巨大字符串的应用。我们可以通过管道将 figlet 的输出连接到 lolcat 中来给出如下的多彩输出:**
|
||||
**6. 通过管道连接 lolcat 和 figlet 命令。Figlet 是一个展示由常规的屏幕字符组成的巨大字符串的应用。我们可以通过管道将 figlet 的输出连接到 lolcat 中来展示出如下的多彩输出:**
|
||||
|
||||
# echo I ❤ Tecmint | lolcat
|
||||
# figlet I Love Tecmint | lolcat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
多彩的文字
|
||||
*多彩的文字*
|
||||
|
||||
**注**: 毫无疑问 ❤ 是一个 unicode 字符并且为了安装 figlet，你需要像下面那样使用 yum 和 apt 来得到这个软件包:
|
||||
**注**: 注意， ❤ 是一个 unicode 字符。要安装 figlet，你需要像下面那样使用 yum 和 apt 来得到这个软件包:
|
||||
|
||||
# apt-get figlet
|
||||
# yum install figlet
|
||||
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Calendar 的输出
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
动的文本
|
||||
*动的文本*
|
||||
|
||||
这里选项 `-a` 指的是 Animation(动画)， `-d` 指的是 duration(持续时间)。在上面的例子中，持续 500 次动画。
|
||||
|
||||
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Calendar 的输出
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
多彩地显示文件
|
||||
*多彩地显示文件*
|
||||
|
||||
**9. 通过管道连接 lolcat 和 cowsay。cowsay 是一个可配置的正在思考或说话的奶牛，这个程序也支持其他的动物。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -136,15 +136,15 @@ Calendar 的输出
|
||||
skeleton snowman sodomized-sheep stegosaurus stimpy suse three-eyes turkey
|
||||
turtle tux unipony unipony-smaller vader vader-koala www
|
||||
|
||||
通过管道连接 lolcat 和 cowsay 后的输出，并且使用了‘gnu’cowfile。
|
||||
通过管道连接 lolcat 和 cowsay 后的输出，并且使用了‘gnu’形象的 cowfile。
|
||||
|
||||
# cowsay -f gnu ☛ Tecmint ☚ is the best Linux Resource Available online | lolcat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
使用 Lolcat 的 Cowsay
|
||||
*使用 Lolcat 的 Cowsay*
|
||||
|
||||
**注**: 你可以在管道中使用 lolcat 和其他任何命令来在终端中得到彩色的输出。
|
||||
**注**: 你可以在将 lolcat 和其他任何命令用管道连接起来在终端中得到彩色的输出。
|
||||
|
||||
**10. 你可以为最常用的命令创建别名来使得命令的输出呈现出彩虹般的色彩。你可以像下面那样为 ‘ls -l‘ 命令创建别名，这个命令输出一个目录中包含内容的列表。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -153,23 +153,24 @@ Calendar 的输出
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
多彩的 Alias 命令
|
||||
*多彩的 Alias 命令*
|
||||
|
||||
你可以像上面建议的那样，为任何命令创建别名。为了使得别名永久生效，你必须添加相关的代码(上面的代码是 ls -l 的别名) 到 ~/.bashrc 文件中，并确保登出后再重新登录来使得更改生效。
|
||||
你可以像上面建议的那样，为任何命令创建别名。为了使得别名永久生效，你需要添加相关的代码(上面的代码是 ls -l 的别名) 到 ~/.bashrc 文件中，并登出后再重新登录来使得更改生效。
|
||||
|
||||
现在就是这些了。我想知道你是否曾经注意过 lolcat 这个工具？你是否喜欢这篇文章？欢迎在下面的评论环节中给出你的建议和反馈。喜欢并分享我们，帮助我们传播。
|
||||
|
||||
现在就是这些了。我想知道你是否曾经注意过 lolcat 这个应用？你是否喜欢这篇文章？欢迎在下面的评论环节中给出你的建议和反馈。喜欢并分享我们，帮助我们传播。
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/lolcat-command-to-output-rainbow-of-colors-in-linux-terminal/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Avishek Kumar][a]
|
||||
译者：[FSSlc](https://github.com/FSSlc)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/avishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/20-funny-commands-of-linux-or-linux-is-fun-in-terminal/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.tecmint.com/linux-funny-commands/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.tecmint.com/play-with-word-and-character-counts-in-linux/
|
||||
[1]:https://linux.cn/article-2831-1.html
|
||||
[2]:https://linux.cn/article-4128-1.html
|
||||
[3]:https://linux.cn/article-4088-1.html
|
||||
[4]:http://www.tecmint.com/13-basic-cat-command-examples-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
|
||||
动态壁纸给linux发行版添加活力背景
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
**我们知道你想拥有一个有格调的ubuntu桌面来炫耀一下 ：）**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*Live Wallpaper*
|
||||
|
||||
在linxu上费一点点劲搭建一个出色的工作环境是很简单的。今天，我们（[重新][2]）着重来探讨长驻你脑海中那些东西 ：一款自由，开源，能够给你的截图增添光彩的工具。
|
||||
|
||||
它叫 **Live Wallpaper** (正如你猜的那样) ，它用由OpenGL驱动的一款动态桌面背景来代替标准的静态桌面背景。
|
||||
|
||||
最好的一点是：在ubuntu上安装它很容易。
|
||||
|
||||
### 动态壁纸主题 ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper 不是此类软件唯一的一款，但它是最好的一款之一。
|
||||
|
||||
它附带很多不同的开箱即用的主题。
|
||||
|
||||
从精细的(‘noise’)到狂热的 (‘nexus’)，包罗万象，甚至有受到Ubuntu Phone欢迎屏幕启发的obligatory锁屏壁纸。
|
||||
|
||||
- Circles — 带着‘evolving circle’风格的时钟，灵感来自于Ubuntu Phone
|
||||
- Galaxy — 支持自定义大小，位置的旋转星系
|
||||
- Gradient Clock — 放在倾斜面上的polar时钟
|
||||
- Nexus — 亮色粒子火花穿越屏幕
|
||||
- Noise — 类似于iOS动态壁纸的Bokeh设计
|
||||
- Photoslide — 由文件夹（默认为 ~/Photos）内照片构成的动态网格相册
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper **完全开源**，所以没有什么能够阻挡天马行空的艺术家们用诀窍（当然还有耐心）来创造他们自己的精美主题。
|
||||
|
||||
### 设置 & 特点 ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
虽然某些主题与其它主题相比有更多的选项，但每款主题都可以通过某些方式来配置或者定制。
|
||||
|
||||
例如，Nexus主题中 (上图所示) 你可以更改脉冲粒子的数量，颜色，大小和出现频率。
|
||||
|
||||
首选项提供了 **通用选项** 适用于所有主题，包括:
|
||||
|
||||
- 设置登录界面的动态壁纸
|
||||
- 自定义动画背景
|
||||
- 调节 FPS (包括在屏幕上显示FPS)
|
||||
- 指定多显示器的行为
|
||||
|
||||
有如此多的选项，diy适用于你自己的桌面背景是很容易的。
|
||||
|
||||
### 缺陷 ###
|
||||
|
||||
#### 没有桌面图标 ####
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper在运行时，你无法在桌面添加，打开或者是编辑文件和文件夹。
|
||||
|
||||
首选项程序提供了一个选项来让你这样做（只是猜测）。也许是它只能在老版本中使用，在我们的测试中－测试环境为Ununtu 14.10，它不工作。但在测试中发现当把桌面壁纸设置成格式为png的图片文件时，这个选项有用，不需要是透明的png图片文件，只要是png图片文件就行了。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 资源占用 ####
|
||||
|
||||
动态壁纸与标准的壁纸相比要消耗更多的系统资源。
|
||||
|
||||
我们并不是说任何时候都会消耗大量资源，但至少在我们的测试中是这样，所以低配置机器和笔记本用户要谨慎使用这款软件。可以使用 [系统监视器][2] 来追踪CPU 和GPU的负载。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 退出程序 ####
|
||||
|
||||
对我来说最大的“bug”绝对是没有“退出”选项。
|
||||
|
||||
当然，动态壁纸可以通过托盘图标和首选项完全退出，那退出托盘图标呢？没办法。只能在终端执行命令‘pkill livewallpaper’。
|
||||
|
||||
### 怎么在 Ubuntu 14.04 LTS+ 上安装 Live Wallpaper ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
要想在Ubuntu 14.04 LTS 和更高版本中安装 Live Wallpaper，你首先需要把官方PPA添加进你的软件源。
|
||||
最快的方法是在终端中执行下列命令:
|
||||
|
||||
sudo add-apt-repository ppa:fyrmir/livewallpaper-daily
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get update && sudo apt-get install livewallpaper
|
||||
|
||||
你还需要安装 indicator applet，这样可以方便快速的打开或是关闭动态壁纸，从菜单选择主题，另外图形配置工具可以让你基于你自己的口味来配置每款主题。
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get install livewallpaper-config livewallpaper-indicator
|
||||
|
||||
所有都安装好之后你就可以通过Unity Dash来启动它和它的首选项工具了。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
让人不爽的是，安装完成后，程序不会自动打开托盘图标，而仅仅将它自己加入自动启动项，所以，快速来个注销 -> 登陆它就会出现啦。
|
||||
|
||||
### 总结 ###
|
||||
|
||||
如果你正处在无聊呆板的桌面中，幻想有一个更有活力的生活，不妨试试。另外，告诉我们你想看到什么样的动态壁纸！
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2015/05/animated-wallpaper-adds-live-backgrounds-to-linux-distros
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Joey-Elijah Sneddon][a]
|
||||
译者：[Love-xuan](https://github.com/Love-xuan)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:https://plus.google.com/117485690627814051450/?rel=author
|
||||
[1]:http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2012/11/live-wallpaper-for-ubuntu
|
||||
[2]:http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2011/11/5-system-monitoring-tools-for-ubuntu
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
|
||||
LFS中文版手册发布：如何打造自己的 Linux 发行版
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
您是否想过打造您自己的 Linux 发行版？每个 Linux 用户在他们使用 Linux 的过程中都想过做一个他们自己的发行版，至少一次。我也不例外，作为一个 Linux 菜鸟，我也考虑过开发一个自己的 Linux 发行版。从头开发一个 Linux 发行版这件事情被称作 Linux From Scratch （LFS）。
|
||||
|
||||
在开始之前，我总结了一些有关 LFS 的内容，如下：
|
||||
|
||||
**1. 那些想要打造他们自己的 Linux 发行版的人应该了解打造一个 Linux 发行版（打造意味着从头开始）与配置一个已有的 Linux 发行版的不同**
|
||||
|
||||
如果您只是想调整下启动屏幕、定制登录页面以及拥有更好的外观和使用体验。您可以选择任何一个 Linux 发行版并且按照您的喜好进行个性化配置。此外，有许多配置工具可以帮助您。
|
||||
|
||||
如果您想打包所有必须的文件、引导加载器和内核，并选择什么该被包括进来，然后依靠自己编译这一切东西。那么您需要的就是 Linux From Scratch （LFS）。
|
||||
|
||||
**注意**：如果您只想要定制 Linux 系统的外表和体验，这个指南并不适合您。但如果您真的想打造一个 Linux 发行版，并且向了解怎么开始以及一些其他的信息，那么这个指南正是为您而写。
|
||||
|
||||
**2. 打造一个 Linux 发行版（LFS）的好处**
|
||||
|
||||
- 您将了解 Linux 系统的内部工作机制
|
||||
- 您将开发一个灵活的适应您需求的系统
|
||||
- 您开发的系统（LFS）将会非常紧凑，因为您对该包含/不该包含什么拥有绝对的掌控
|
||||
- 您开发的系统（LFS）在安全性上会更好
|
||||
|
||||
**3. 打造一个Linux发行版（LFS）的坏处**
|
||||
|
||||
打造一个 Linux 系统意味着将所有需要的东西放在一起并且编译之。这需要许多查阅、耐心和时间。而且您需要一个可用的 Linux 系统和足够的磁盘空间来打造 LFS。
|
||||
|
||||
**4. 有趣的是，Gentoo/GNU Linux 在某种意义上最接近于 LFS。Gentoo 和 LFS 都是完全从源码编译的定制的 Linux 系统**
|
||||
|
||||
**5. 您应该是一个有经验的Linux用户，对编译包、解决依赖有相当的了解，并且是个 shell 脚本的专家。**
|
||||
|
||||
了解一门编程语言（最好是 C 语言）将会使事情变得容易些。但哪怕您是一个新手，只要您是一个优秀的学习者，可以很快的掌握知识，您也可以开始。最重要的是不要在 LFS 过程中丢失您的热情。
|
||||
|
||||
如果您不够坚定，恐怕会在 LFS 进行到一半时放弃。
|
||||
|
||||
**6. 现在您需要一步一步的指导来打造一个 Linux 。LFS 手册是打造 LFS 的官方指南。我们的合作站点 tradepub 也为我们的读者制作了 LFS 的指南，这同样是免费的。 ###
|
||||
|
||||
您可以从下面的链接下载 Linux From Scratch 的电子书：
|
||||
|
||||
[][1]
|
||||
|
||||
下载: [Linux From Scratch][1]
|
||||
|
||||
**7. 当前 LFS 的版本是 7.7，分为 systemd 版本和非 systemd 版本**
|
||||
|
||||
LFS 的官方网站是： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/
|
||||
|
||||
您可以在官网在线浏览 LFS 以及类似 BLFS 这样的相关项目的手册，也可以下载不同格式的版本。
|
||||
|
||||
- LFS （非 systemd 版本）：
|
||||
- PDF 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/stable/LFS-BOOK-7.7.pdf
|
||||
- 单一 HTML 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/stable/LFS-BOOK-7.7-NOCHUNKS.html
|
||||
- 打包的多页 HTML 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/stable/LFS-BOOK-7.7.tar.bz2
|
||||
- LFS （systemd 版本）：
|
||||
- PDF 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/7.7-systemd/LFS-BOOK-7.7-systemd.pdf
|
||||
- 单一 HTML 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/7.7-systemd/LFS-BOOK-7.7-systemd-NOCHUNKS.html
|
||||
- 打包的多页 HTML 版本： http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/downloads/7.7-systemd/LFS-BOOK-7.7-systemd.tar.bz2
|
||||
|
||||
**8. Linux 中国/LCTT 翻译了一份 LFS 手册（7.7，systemd 版本）**
|
||||
|
||||
经过 LCTT 成员的努力，我们终于完成了对 LFS 7.7 systemd 版本手册的翻译。
|
||||
|
||||
手册在线访问地址：https://linux.cn/lfs/LFS-BOOK-7.7-systemd/index.html 。
|
||||
|
||||
其它格式的版本稍后推出。
|
||||
|
||||
感谢参与翻译的成员： wxy, ictlyh, dongfengweixiao, zpl1025, H-mudcup, Yuking-net, kevinSJ 。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### 关于：Linux From Scratch ###
|
||||
|
||||
这本手册是由 LFS 的项目领头人 Gerard Beekmans 创作的， Matthew Burgess 和 Bruse Dubbs 参与编辑，两人都是LFS 项目的联合领导人。这本书内容很广泛，有 338 页之多。
|
||||
|
||||
手册中内容包括：介绍 LFS、准备构建、构建 LFS、建立启动脚本、使 LFS 可以引导，以及附录。其中涵盖了您想知道的 LFS 项目中的所有东西。
|
||||
|
||||
这本手册还给出了编译一个包的预估时间。预估的时间以编译第一个包的时间作为参考。所有的东西都以易于理解的方式呈现，甚至对于新手来说也是这样。
|
||||
|
||||
如果您有充裕的时间并且真正对构建自己的 Linux 发行版感兴趣，那么您绝对不会错过下载这个电子书（免费下载）的机会。您需要做的，便是照着这本手册在一个工作的 Linux 系统（任何 Linux 发行版，足够的磁盘空间即可）中开始构建您自己的 Linux 系统，付出时间和热情。
|
||||
|
||||
如果 Linux 使您着迷，如果您想自己动手构建一个自己的 Linux 发行版，这便是现阶段您应该知道的全部了，其他的信息您可以参考上面链接的手册中的内容。
|
||||
|
||||
请让我了解您阅读/使用这本手册的经历，这本详尽的 LFS 指南的使用是否足够简单？如果您已经构建了一个 LFS 并且想给我们的读者一些建议，欢迎留言和反馈。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-custom-linux-distribution-from-scratch/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Avishek Kumar][a]
|
||||
译者：[wwy-hust](https://github.com/wwy-hust)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/avishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://tecmint.tradepub.com/free/w_linu01/prgm.cgi
|
||||
@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
|
||||
在Ubuntu 15.04中安装RUby on Rails
|
||||
在Ubuntu 15.04中安装Ruby on Rails
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
本篇我们会学习如何用rbenv在Ubuntu 15.04中安装Ruby on Rails。我们选择Ubuntu作为操作系统因为Ubuntu是Linux发行版中自带很多包和完整文档的操作系统，因此我认为这是正确的选择。如果你不想安装最新的Ubuntu，你可以从[下载iso文件][1]开始。
|
||||
|
||||
本篇我们会学习如何用rbenv在Ubuntu 15.04中安装Ruby on Rails。我们选择Ubuntu作为操作系统是因为Ubuntu是Linux发行版中自带很多包和完整文档的操作系统，因此我认为这是正确的选择。如果你还没有安装最新的Ubuntu，你可以从[下载iso文件][1]开始。
|
||||
|
||||
### 安装 Ruby ###
|
||||
|
||||
@ -9,9 +10,9 @@
|
||||
sudo apt-get update
|
||||
sudo apt-get install git-core curl zlib1g-dev build-essential libssl-dev libreadline-dev libyaml-dev libsqlite3-dev sqlite3 libxml2-dev libxslt1-dev libcurl4-openssl-dev python-software-properties libffi-dev
|
||||
|
||||
有三种方法来安装Ruby比如rbenv,rvm和从源码安装。每种都有各自的好处，但是这些天开发者们更倾向使用rbenv而不是rvm和源码来安装。我们将安装最新的Ruby版本，2.2.2。
|
||||
有三种方法来安装Ruby：rbenv、rvm和从源码安装。每种都有各自的好处，但是近来开发者们更倾向使用rbenv而不是rvm和源码来安装。我们将安装最新的Ruby版本，2.2.2。
|
||||
|
||||
用rbenv来安装只有简单的两步。第一步安装rbenv接着是ruby-build：
|
||||
用rbenv来安装只有简单的两步。第一步安装rbenv，接着是ruby-build：
|
||||
|
||||
cd
|
||||
git clone git://github.com/sstephenson/rbenv.git .rbenv
|
||||
@ -28,23 +29,23 @@
|
||||
rbenv global 2.2.2
|
||||
ruby -v
|
||||
|
||||
我们需要安装Bundler但是我们要在安装之前告诉rubygems不要为每个包本地安装文档。
|
||||
我们需要安装Bundler，但是我们要在安装之前告诉rubygems不要为每个包安装本地文档。
|
||||
|
||||
echo "gem: --no-ri --no-rdoc" > ~/.gemrc
|
||||
gem install bundler
|
||||
|
||||
### 配置 GIT ###
|
||||
|
||||
配置git之前，你要创建一个github账号，你可以注册[git][2]。我们需要git作为版本控制系统，因此我们要设置来匹配github账号。
|
||||
配置git之前，你要创建一个github账号，你可以注册一个[github 账号][2]。我们需要git作为版本控制系统，因此我们要设置它来匹配github账号。
|
||||
|
||||
用户的github账号来代替下面的**Name** 和 **Email address** 。
|
||||
用户的github账号来替换下面的**Name** 和 **Email address** 。
|
||||
|
||||
git config --global color.ui true
|
||||
git config --global user.name "YOUR NAME"
|
||||
git config --global user.email "YOUR@EMAIL.com"
|
||||
ssh-keygen -t rsa -C "YOUR@EMAIL.com"
|
||||
|
||||
接下来用新生成的ssh key添加到github账号中。这样你需要复制下面命令的输出并[粘贴在这][3]。
|
||||
接下来用新生成的ssh key添加到github账号中。这样你需要复制下面命令的输出并[粘贴在Github的设置页面里面][3]。
|
||||
|
||||
cat ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub
|
||||
|
||||
@ -58,7 +59,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
### 安装 Rails ###
|
||||
|
||||
我们需要安装javascript运行时，像NodeJS因为这些天Rails带来很多依赖。这样我们可以结合并缩小你的javascript来提供一个更快的生产环境。
|
||||
我们需要安装像NodeJS这样的javascript运行时环境，因为近来Rails的依赖越来越多了。这样我们可以合并和压缩你的javascript，从而提供一个更快的生产环境。
|
||||
|
||||
我们需要添加PPA来安装nodeJS。
|
||||
|
||||
@ -66,7 +67,7 @@
|
||||
sudo apt-get update
|
||||
sudo apt-get install nodejs
|
||||
|
||||
如果在更新是晕倒了问题，你可以试试这个命令：
|
||||
如果在更新时遇到了问题，你可以试试这个命令：
|
||||
|
||||
# Note the new setup script name for Node.js v0.12
|
||||
curl -sL https://deb.nodesource.com/setup_0.12 | sudo bash -
|
||||
@ -74,15 +75,15 @@
|
||||
# Then install with:
|
||||
sudo apt-get install -y nodejs
|
||||
|
||||
下一步，用这个命令：
|
||||
下一步，用这个命令安装 rails：
|
||||
|
||||
gem install rails -v 4.2.1
|
||||
|
||||
因为我们正在使用rbenv，用下面的命令来安装rails。
|
||||
因为我们正在使用rbenv，用下面的命令来让rails的执行程序可以使用。
|
||||
|
||||
rbenv rehash
|
||||
|
||||
要确保rails已经正确安炸u哪个，你可以运行rails -v，显示如下：
|
||||
要确保rails已经正确安装，你可以运行rails -v，显示如下：
|
||||
|
||||
rails -v
|
||||
# Rails 4.2.1
|
||||
@ -91,25 +92,25 @@
|
||||
|
||||
### 设置 MySQL ###
|
||||
|
||||
或许你已经熟悉MySQL了，你可以从Ubuntu的仓库中安装MySQL的客户端与服务端。你可以在安装时设置root用户密码。这个信息将来会进入你rails程序的database.yml文件中、用下面的命令来安装mysql。
|
||||
或许你已经熟悉MySQL了，你可以从Ubuntu的仓库中安装MySQL的客户端与服务端。你可以在安装时设置root用户密码。这个信息将来会进入你rails程序的database.yml文件中。用下面的命令来安装mysql。
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get install mysql-server mysql-client libmysqlclient-dev
|
||||
|
||||
安装libmysqlclient-dev用于提供在设置rails程序时，rails在连接mysql所需要用到的用于编译mysql2 gem的文件。
|
||||
安装libmysqlclient-dev用于mysql2 gem的编译；在设置rails程序时，rails通过它来连接mysql。
|
||||
|
||||
### 最后一步 ###
|
||||
|
||||
让我们尝试创建你的第一个rails程序：
|
||||
|
||||
# Use MySQL
|
||||
# 使用 MySQL 数据库
|
||||
|
||||
rails new myapp -d mysql
|
||||
|
||||
# Move into the application directory
|
||||
# 进入到应用目录
|
||||
|
||||
cd myapp
|
||||
|
||||
# Create Database
|
||||
# 创建数据库
|
||||
|
||||
rake db:create
|
||||
|
||||
@ -125,7 +126,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
nano config/database.yml
|
||||
|
||||
接着输入MySql root用户的密码。
|
||||
接着填入MySql root用户的密码。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -133,7 +134,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
### 总结 ###
|
||||
|
||||
Rails是用Ruby写的， 也就是随着rails一起使用的编程语言。在Ubuntu 15.04中Ruby on Rails可以用rbenv、 rvm和源码的方式来安装。本篇我们使用的是rbenv方式并用了MySQL作为数据库。有任何的问题或建议，请在评论栏指出。
|
||||
Rails是用Ruby写的， 也是随着rails一起使用的编程语言。在Ubuntu 15.04中Ruby on Rails可以用rbenv、 rvm和源码的方式来安装。本篇我们使用的是rbenv方式并用了MySQL作为数据库。有任何的问题或建议，请在评论栏指出。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ via: http://linoxide.com/ubuntu-how-to/installing-ruby-rails-using-rbenv-ubuntu-
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Obet][a]
|
||||
译者：[geekpi](https://github.com/geekpi)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,23 +1,22 @@
|
||||
Linux_Logo – 输出彩色 ANSI Linux 发行版徽标的命令行工具
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
linuxlogo 或 linux_logo 是一款在Linux命令行下生成附带系统信息的彩色 ANSI 发行版徽标的工具。
|
||||
|
||||
linuxlogo（或叫 linux_logo）是一款在Linux命令行下用彩色 ANSI 代码生成附带有系统信息的发行版徽标的工具。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Linux_Logo – 输出彩色 ANSI Linux 发行版徽标
|
||||
*Linux_Logo – 输出彩色 ANSI Linux 发行版徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
这个小工具可以从 /proc 文件系统中获取系统信息并可以显示包括主机发行版在内的其他很多发行版的徽标。
|
||||
这个小工具可以从 /proc 文件系统中获取系统信息并可以显示包括主机上安装的发行版在内的很多发行版的徽标。
|
||||
|
||||
与徽标一同显示的系统信息包括 – Linux 内核版本，最近一次编译Linux内核的时间，处理器/核心数量，速度，制造商，以及哪一代处理器。它还能显示总共的物理内存大小。
|
||||
与徽标一同显示的系统信息包括 ： Linux 内核版本，最近一次编译Linux内核的时间，处理器/核心数量，速度，制造商，以及哪一代处理器。它还能显示总共的物理内存大小。
|
||||
|
||||
值得一提的是，screenfetch是一个拥有类似功能的工具，它也能显示发行版徽标，同时还提供更加详细美观的系统信息。我们之前已经介绍过这个工具，你可以参考一下链接：
|
||||
- [ScreenFetch – Generates Linux System Information][1]
|
||||
无独有偶，screenfetch是一个拥有类似功能的工具，它也能显示发行版徽标，同时还提供更加详细美观的系统信息。我们之前已经介绍过这个工具，你可以参考一下链接：
|
||||
|
||||
- [screenFetch: 命令行信息截图工具][1]
|
||||
|
||||
linux_logo 和 Screenfetch 并不能相提并论。尽管 screenfetch 的输出较为整洁并提供更多细节， linux_logo 则提供了更多的彩色 ANSI 图标， 并且提供了格式化输出的选项。
|
||||
linux\_logo 和 Screenfetch 并完全一样。尽管 screenfetch 的输出较为整洁并提供更多细节， 但 linux\_logo 则提供了更多的彩色 ANSI 图标， 并且提供了格式化输出的选项。
|
||||
|
||||
linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统中因此需要安装图形界面 X11 或 X 系统。这个软件使用GNU 2.0协议。
|
||||
linux\_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统中因此需要安装图形界面 X11 或 X 系统（LCTT 译注：此处应是错误的。按说不需要任何图形界面支持，并且译者从其官方站 http://www.deater.net/weave/vmwprod/linux_logo 也没找到任何相关 X11的信息）。这个软件使用GNU 2.0协议。
|
||||
|
||||
本文中，我们将使用以下环境测试 linux_logo 工具。
|
||||
|
||||
@ -26,7 +25,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
### 在 Linux 中安装 Linux Logo工具 ###
|
||||
|
||||
**1. linuxlogo软件包 ( 5.11 稳定版) 可通过如下方式使用 apt, yum,或 dnf 在所有发行版中使用默认的软件仓库进行安装**
|
||||
**1. linuxlogo软件包 ( 5.11 稳定版) 可通过如下方式使用 apt, yum 或 dnf 在所有发行版中使用默认的软件仓库进行安装**
|
||||
|
||||
# apt-get install linux_logo [用于基于 Apt 的系统] （译者注：Ubuntu中，该软件包名为linuxlogo）
|
||||
# yum install linux_logo [用于基于 Yum 的系统]
|
||||
@ -42,7 +41,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
获取默认系统徽标
|
||||
*获取默认系统徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
**3. 使用 `[-a]` 选项可以输出没有颜色的徽标。当在黑白终端里使用 linux_logo 时，这个选项会很有用。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -50,7 +49,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
黑白 Linux 徽标
|
||||
*黑白 Linux 徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
**4. 使用 `[-l]` 选项可以仅输出徽标而不包含系统信息。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -58,7 +57,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
输出发行版徽标
|
||||
*输出发行版徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
**5. `[-u]` 选项可以显示系统运行时间。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -66,7 +65,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
输出系统运行时间
|
||||
*输出系统运行时间*
|
||||
|
||||
**6. 如果你对系统平均负载感兴趣，可以使用 `[-y]` 选项。你可以同时使用多个选项。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -74,7 +73,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
输出系统平均负载
|
||||
*输出系统平均负载*
|
||||
|
||||
如需查看更多选项并获取相关帮助，你可以使用如下命令。
|
||||
|
||||
@ -82,7 +81,7 @@ linux_logo 主要使用C语言编写并将 linux 徽标呈现在 X 窗口系统
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Linuxlogo选项及帮助
|
||||
*Linuxlogo选项及帮助*
|
||||
|
||||
**7. 此工具内置了很多不同发行版的徽标。你可以使用 `[-L list]` 选项查看在这些徽标的列表。**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -90,7 +89,7 @@ Linuxlogo选项及帮助
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
*Linux 徽标列表*
|
||||
|
||||
如果你想输出这个列表中的任意徽标，可以使用 `-L NUM` 或 `-L NAME` 来显示想要选中的图标。
|
||||
|
||||
@ -105,7 +104,7 @@ Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
输出 AIX 图标
|
||||
*输出 AIX 图标*
|
||||
|
||||
**注**: 命令中的使用 `-L 1` 是因为 AIX 徽标在列表中的编号是1，而使用 `-L aix` 则是因为 AIX 徽标在列表中的名称为 aix
|
||||
|
||||
@ -116,13 +115,13 @@ Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
各种 Linux 徽标
|
||||
*各种 Linux 徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
你可以通过徽标对应的编号或名字使用任意徽标
|
||||
你可以通过徽标对应的编号或名字使用任意徽标。
|
||||
|
||||
### 一些使用 Linux_logo 的建议和提示###
|
||||
|
||||
**8. 你可以在登录界面输出你的 Linux 发行版徽标。要输出默认徽标，你可以在 ` ~/.bashrc`` 文件的最后添加以下内容。**
|
||||
**8. 你可以在登录界面输出你的 Linux 发行版徽标。要输出默认徽标，你可以在 ` ~/.bashrc` 文件的最后添加以下内容。**
|
||||
|
||||
if [ -f /usr/bin/linux_logo ]; then linux_logo; fi
|
||||
|
||||
@ -132,15 +131,15 @@ Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
在用户登录时输出徽标
|
||||
*在用户登录时输出徽标*
|
||||
|
||||
其实你也可以在登录后输出任意图标，只需加入以下内容
|
||||
其实你也可以在登录后输出任意图标，只需加入以下内容：
|
||||
|
||||
if [ -f /usr/bin/linux_logo ]; then linux_logo -L num; fi
|
||||
|
||||
**重要**: 不要忘了将 num 替换成你想使用的图标。
|
||||
|
||||
**10. You can also print your own logo by simply specifying the location of the logo as shown below.**
|
||||
**10. 你也能直接指定徽标所在的位置来显示你自己的徽标。**
|
||||
|
||||
# linux_logo -D /path/to/ASCII/logo
|
||||
|
||||
@ -152,12 +151,11 @@ Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
|
||||
# /usr/local/bin/linux_logo -a > /etc/issue.net
|
||||
|
||||
**12. 创建一个 Penguin 端口 - 用于回应连接的端口。要创建 Penguin 端口， 则需在 /etc/services 文件中加入以下内容 **
|
||||
**12. 创建一个 Linux 上的端口 - 用于回应连接的端口。要创建 Linux 端口， 则需在 /etc/services 文件中加入以下内容**
|
||||
|
||||
penguin 4444/tcp penguin
|
||||
|
||||
这里的 `4444` 是一个未被任何其他资源使用的空闲端口。你也可以使用其他端口。
|
||||
你还需要在 /etc/inetd.conf中加入以下内容
|
||||
这里的 `4444` 是一个未被任何其他资源使用的空闲端口。你也可以使用其他端口。你还需要在 /etc/inetd.conf中加入以下内容：
|
||||
|
||||
penguin stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/bin/linux_logo
|
||||
|
||||
@ -165,6 +163,8 @@ Linux 徽标列表
|
||||
|
||||
# killall -HUP inetd
|
||||
|
||||
（LCTT 译注：然后你就可以远程或本地连接到这个端口，并显示这个徽标了。）
|
||||
|
||||
linux_logo 还可以用做启动脚本来愚弄攻击者或对你朋友使用恶作剧。这是一个我经常在我的脚本中用来获取不同发行版输出的好工具。
|
||||
|
||||
试过一次后，你就不会忘记的。让我们知道你对这个工具的想法及它对你的作用吧。 不要忘记给评论、点赞或分享！
|
||||
@ -174,10 +174,10 @@ linux_logo 还可以用做启动脚本来愚弄攻击者或对你朋友使用恶
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/linux_logo-tool-to-print-color-ansi-logos-of-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Avishek Kumar][a]
|
||||
译者：[KevSJ](https://github.com/KevSJ)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
译者：[KevinSJ](https://github.com/KevinSJ)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/avishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/screenfetch-system-information-generator-for-linux/
|
||||
[1]:https://linux.cn/article-1947-1.html
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
|
||||
原子(Atom)代码编辑器的视频短片介绍
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[Atom 1.0][1]时代来临。作为[最好的开源代码编辑器]之一，Atom已公开使用快一年了，近段时间，第一个稳定版本的原子编辑器的发布却引起了广大用户的谈论。这个[Github][4]上的项目随着“为21世纪破解文本编辑器”活动的兴起，已近被下载了150万余次，积累35万活跃用户。
|
||||
|
||||
### 这是个漫长的过程 ###
|
||||
|
||||
滴水穿石，非一日之功，Atom同样经历一个漫长的过程。从2008年首次提出概念到这个月第一个稳定版本的发布，主创人员和全球各地的贡献者，这几年来不断地致力于Atom核心的开发。我们通过下面这张图来了解一下Atom的发展过程：
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*图片来源：Atom*
|
||||
|
||||
### 回到未来 ###
|
||||
|
||||
Atom 1.0 通过流行的视频发布方式，展示了这款编辑器的潜能。这个视屏就像70年代的科幻连续剧一样，今天你将会看到一个极其酷炫的视屏：
|
||||
|
||||
注：youtube视频，不行做个链接吧
|
||||
<iframe width="640" height="390" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen="true" src="http://www.youtube.com/embed/Y7aEiVwBAdk?version=3&rel=1&fs=1&showsearch=0&showinfo=1&iv_load_policy=1&wmode=transparent" type="text/html" class="youtube-player"></iframe>
|
||||
|
||||
### 原子编辑器特点 ###
|
||||
|
||||
- 跨平台编辑
|
||||
- 实现包管理
|
||||
- 智能化、自动化
|
||||
- 文件系统视图
|
||||
- 多窗操作
|
||||
- 支持查找更换
|
||||
- 高度个性化
|
||||
- 界面更新颖
|
||||
|
||||
### Atom 1.0起来 ###
|
||||
|
||||
Atom 1.0 支持Linux，Windows和Mac OS X。对于基于Debian的Linux，例如Ubuntu和Linux Mint，Atom提供了deb包。对于Fedora，同样有rpm包。如果你愿意，你可以下载源代码。通过下面的链接下载最新的版本。
|
||||
|
||||
- [Atom .deb][5]
|
||||
- [Atom .rpm][6]
|
||||
- [Atom Source Code][7]
|
||||
|
||||
如果你愿意，你可以[通过PPA在Ubuntu上安装Atom]。PPA并不是官方解决方案。
|
||||
|
||||
注：下面是一个调查，可以发布的时候在文章内发布个调查
|
||||
|
||||
#### 你对Atom感兴趣吗？ ####
|
||||
|
||||
- 噢，当然！这是程序员的福音。
|
||||
- 我并不这样认为。我见过更好的编辑器。
|
||||
- 并不关心，我的默认编辑器就能胜任我的工作。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/atom-stable-released/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[sevenot](https://github.com/sevenot)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://blog.atom.io/2015/06/25/atom-1-0.html
|
||||
[2]:http://itsfoss.com/best-modern-open-source-code-editors-for-linux/
|
||||
[3]:https://atom.io/
|
||||
[4]:https://github.com/
|
||||
[5]:https://atom.io/download/deb
|
||||
[6]:https://atom.io/download/rpm
|
||||
[7]:https://github.com/atom/atom/blob/master/docs/build-instructions/linux.md
|
||||
[8]:http://itsfoss.com/install-atom-text-editor-ubuntu-1404-linux-mint-17/
|
||||
@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
|
||||
Linux常见问题解答--如何修复"tar：由于前一个错误导致于失败状态中退出"("Exiting with failure status due to previous errors")
|
||||
Linux常见问题解答--如何修复"tar：由于前一个错误导致于失败状态中退出"
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
> **问题**: 当我想试着用tar命令来创建一个压缩文件时，总在执行过程中失败，并且抛出一个错误说明"tar：由于前一个错误导致于失败状态中退出"("Exiting with failure status due to previous errors"). 什么导致这个错误的发生，要如何解决？
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
如果当你执行tar命令时，遇到了下面的错误，那么最有可能的原因是对于你想用tar命令压缩的某个文件中，你并不具备其读权限。
|
||||
@ -13,21 +14,20 @@ Linux常见问题解答--如何修复"tar：由于前一个错误导致于失败
|
||||
|
||||
$ tar cvzfz backup.tgz my_program/ > /dev/null
|
||||
|
||||
然后你会看到tar输出的标准错误(stderr)信息。
|
||||
然后你会看到tar输出的标准错误(stderr)信息。（LCTT 译注：自然，不用 v 参数也可以。）
|
||||
|
||||
tar: my_program/src/lib/.conf.db.~lock~: Cannot open: Permission denied
|
||||
tar: Exiting with failure status due to previous errors
|
||||
|
||||
你可以从上面的例子中看到，引起错误的原因的确是“读权限不允许”（denied read permission.)
|
||||
要解决这个问题，只要简单地更改(或移除)问题文件的权限，然后重新执行tar命令即可。
|
||||
你可以从上面的例子中看到，引起错误的原因的确是“读权限不允许”（denied read permission.)要解决这个问题，只要简单地更改(或移除)问题文件的权限，然后重新执行tar命令即可。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://ask.xmodulo.com/tar-exiting-with-failure-status-due-to-previous-errors.html
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Dan Nanni][a]
|
||||
译者：[XLCYun(袖里藏云)](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
译者：[XLCYun(袖里藏云)](https://github.com/XLCYun)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
|
||||
Linux 答疑--如何在 Ubuntu 15.04 的 GNOME 终端中开启多个标签
|
||||
Linux有问必答：如何在 Ubuntu 15.04 的 GNOME 终端中开启多个标签
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
> **问**: 我以前可以在我的 Ubuntu 台式机中的 gnome-terminal 中开启多个标签。但升到 Ubuntu 15.04 后，我就无法再在 gnome-terminal 窗口中打开新标签了。要怎样做才能在 Ubuntu 15.04 的 gnome-terminal 中打开标签呢？
|
||||
|
||||
在 Ubuntu 14.10 或之前的版本中，gnome-terminal 允许你在终端窗口中开启一个新标签或一个终端窗口。但从 Ubuntu 15.04开始，gnome-terminal 移除了“新标签”选项。这实际上并不是一个 bug，而是一个合并新标签和新窗口的举措。GNOME 3.12 引入了 [单独的“开启终端”选项][1]。开启新终端标签的功能从终端菜单移动到了首选项中。
|
||||
在 Ubuntu 14.10 或之前的版本中，gnome-terminal 允许你在终端窗口中开启一个新标签或一个终端窗口。但从 Ubuntu 15.04开始，gnome-terminal 移除了“新标签”选项。这实际上并不是一个 bug，而是一个合并新标签和新窗口的举措。GNOME 3.12 引入了[单独的“开启终端”选项][1]。开启新终端标签的功能从终端菜单移动到了首选项中。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Linux 答疑--如何在 Ubuntu 15.04 的 GNOME 终端中开启多个标签
|
||||
via: http://ask.xmodulo.com/open-multiple-tabs-gnome-terminal-ubuntu.html
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Dan Nanni][a]
|
||||
译者：[KevSJ](https://github.com/KevSJ)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
译者：[KevinSJ](https://github.com/KevinSJ)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
|
||||
为什么 mysql 里的 ibdata1 文件不断的增长？
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
我们在 [Percona 支持栏目][1]经常收到关于 MySQL 的 ibdata1 文件的这个问题。
|
||||
|
||||
当监控服务器发送一个关于 MySQL 服务器存储的报警时，恐慌就开始了 —— 就是说磁盘快要满了。
|
||||
|
||||
一番调查后你意识到大多数地盘空间被 InnoDB 的共享表空间 ibdata1 使用。而你已经启用了 [innodb\_file\_per\_table][2]，所以问题是：
|
||||
|
||||
### ibdata1存了什么？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
当你启用了 `innodb_file_per_table`，表被存储在他们自己的表空间里，但是共享表空间仍然在存储其它的 InnoDB 内部数据：
|
||||
|
||||
- 数据字典，也就是 InnoDB 表的元数据
|
||||
- 变更缓冲区
|
||||
- 双写缓冲区
|
||||
- 撤销日志
|
||||
|
||||
其中的一些在 [Percona 服务器][3]上可以被配置来避免增长过大的。例如你可以通过 [innodb\_ibuf\_max\_size][4] 设置最大变更缓冲区，或设置 [innodb\_doublewrite\_file][5] 来将双写缓冲区存储到一个分离的文件。
|
||||
|
||||
MySQL 5.6 版中你也可以创建外部的撤销表空间，所以它们可以放到自己的文件来替代存储到 ibdata1。可以看看这个[文档][6]。
|
||||
|
||||
### 什么引起 ibdata1 增长迅速？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
当 MySQL 出现问题通常我们需要执行的第一个命令是：
|
||||
|
||||
SHOW ENGINE INNODB STATUS/G
|
||||
|
||||
这将展示给我们一些很有价值的信息。我们从** TRANSACTION（事务）**部分开始检查，然后我们会发现这个：
|
||||
|
||||
---TRANSACTION 36E, ACTIVE 1256288 sec
|
||||
MySQL thread id 42, OS thread handle 0x7f8baaccc700, query id 7900290 localhost root
|
||||
show engine innodb status
|
||||
Trx read view will not see trx with id >= 36F, sees < 36F
|
||||
|
||||
这是一个最常见的原因，一个14天前创建的相当老的事务。这个状态是**活动的**，这意味着 InnoDB 已经创建了一个数据的快照，所以需要在**撤销**日志中维护旧页面，以保障数据库的一致性视图，直到事务开始。如果你的数据库有大量的写入任务，那就意味着存储了大量的撤销页。
|
||||
|
||||
如果你找不到任何长时间运行的事务，你也可以监控INNODB STATUS 中的其他的变量，“**History list length（历史记录列表长度）**”展示了一些等待清除操作。这种情况下问题经常发生，因为清除线程（或者老版本的主线程）不能像这些记录进来的速度一样快地处理撤销。
|
||||
|
||||
### 我怎么检查什么被存储到了 ibdata1 里了？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
很不幸，MySQL 不提供查看什么被存储到 ibdata1 共享表空间的信息，但是有两个工具将会很有帮助。第一个是马克·卡拉汉制作的一个修改版 innochecksum ，它发布在[这个漏洞报告][7]里。
|
||||
|
||||
它相当易于使用：
|
||||
|
||||
# ./innochecksum /var/lib/mysql/ibdata1
|
||||
0 bad checksum
|
||||
13 FIL_PAGE_INDEX
|
||||
19272 FIL_PAGE_UNDO_LOG
|
||||
230 FIL_PAGE_INODE
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_IBUF_FREE_LIST
|
||||
892 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_ALLOCATED
|
||||
2 FIL_PAGE_IBUF_BITMAP
|
||||
195 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_SYS
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_TRX_SYS
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_FSP_HDR
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_XDES
|
||||
0 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_BLOB
|
||||
0 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_ZBLOB
|
||||
0 other
|
||||
3 max index_id
|
||||
|
||||
全部的 20608 中有 19272 个撤销日志页。**这占用了表空间的 93%**。
|
||||
|
||||
第二个检查表空间内容的方式是杰里米·科尔制作的 [InnoDB Ruby 工具][8]。它是个检查 InnoDB 的内部结构的更先进的工具。例如我们可以使用 space-summary 参数来得到每个页面及其数据类型的列表。我们可以使用标准的 Unix 工具来统计**撤销日志**页的数量：
|
||||
|
||||
# innodb_space -f /var/lib/mysql/ibdata1 space-summary | grep UNDO_LOG | wc -l
|
||||
19272
|
||||
|
||||
尽管这种特殊的情况下，innochedcksum 更快更容易使用，但是我推荐你使用杰里米的工具去了解更多的 InnoDB 内部的数据分布及其内部结构。
|
||||
|
||||
好，现在我们知道问题所在了。下一个问题：
|
||||
|
||||
### 我该怎么解决问题？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
这个问题的答案很简单。如果你还能提交语句，就做吧。如果不能的话，你必须要杀掉线程开始回滚过程。那将停止 ibdata1 的增长，但是很显然，你的软件会出现漏洞，有些人会遇到错误。现在你知道如何去鉴定问题所在，你需要使用你自己的调试工具或普通的查询日志来找出谁或者什么引起的问题。
|
||||
|
||||
如果问题发生在清除线程，解决方法通常是升级到新版本，新版中使用一个独立的清除线程替代主线程。更多信息查看该[文档][9]
|
||||
|
||||
### 有什么方法回收已使用的空间么？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
没有，目前还没有一个容易并且快速的方法。InnoDB 表空间从不收缩...参见[10 年之久的漏洞报告][10]，最新更新自詹姆斯·戴（谢谢）：
|
||||
|
||||
当你删除一些行，这个页被标为已删除稍后重用，但是这个空间从不会被回收。唯一的方法是使用新的 ibdata1 启动数据库。要做这个你应该需要使用 mysqldump 做一个逻辑全备份，然后停止 MySQL 并删除所有数据库、ib_logfile\*、ibdata1\* 文件。当你再启动 MySQL 的时候将会创建一个新的共享表空间。然后恢复逻辑备份。
|
||||
|
||||
### 总结 ###
|
||||
|
||||
当 ibdata1 文件增长太快，通常是 MySQL 里长时间运行的被遗忘的事务引起的。尝试去解决问题越快越好（提交或者杀死事务），因为不经过痛苦缓慢的 mysqldump 过程，你就不能回收浪费的磁盘空间。
|
||||
|
||||
也是非常推荐监控数据库以避免这些问题。我们的 [MySQL 监控插件][11]包括一个 Nagios 脚本，如果发现了一个太老的运行事务它可以提醒你。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: https://www.percona.com/blog/2013/08/20/why-is-the-ibdata1-file-continuously-growing-in-mysql/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Miguel Angel Nieto][a]
|
||||
译者：[wyangsun](https://github.com/wyangsun)
|
||||
校对：[wxy](https://github.com/wxy)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:https://www.percona.com/blog/author/miguelangelnieto/
|
||||
[1]:https://www.percona.com/products/mysql-support
|
||||
[2]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.5/en/innodb-parameters.html#sysvar_innodb_file_per_table
|
||||
[3]:https://www.percona.com/software/percona-server
|
||||
[4]:https://www.percona.com/doc/percona-server/5.5/scalability/innodb_insert_buffer.html#innodb_ibuf_max_size
|
||||
[5]:https://www.percona.com/doc/percona-server/5.5/performance/innodb_doublewrite_path.html?id=percona-server:features:percona_innodb_doublewrite_path#innodb_doublewrite_file
|
||||
[6]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.6/en/innodb-performance.html#innodb-undo-tablespace
|
||||
[7]:http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=57611
|
||||
[8]:https://github.com/jeremycole/innodb_ruby
|
||||
[9]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/innodb/1.1/en/innodb-improved-purge-scheduling.html
|
||||
[10]:http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=1341
|
||||
[11]:https://www.percona.com/software/percona-monitoring-plugins
|
||||
@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
|
||||
Translating by H-mudcup
|
||||
10 Truly Amusing Easter Eggs in Linux
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
The programmer working on Adventure slipped a secret feature into the game. Instead of getting upset about it, Atari decided to give these sorts of “secret features” a name -- “Easter Eggs” because… you know… you hunt for them. Image credit: Wikipedia.
|
||||
|
||||
Back in 1979, a video game was being developed for the Atari 2600 -- [Adventure][1].
|
||||
|
||||
The programmer working on Adventure slipped a secret feature into the game which, when the user moved an “invisible square” to a particular wall, allowed entry into a “secret room”. That room contained a simple phrase: “Created by [Warren Robinett][2]”.
|
||||
|
||||
Atari had a policy against putting author credits in their games, so this intrepid programmer put his John Hancock on the game by being, well, sneaky. Atari only found out about the “secret room” after Warren Robinett had left the company. Instead of getting upset about it, Atari decided to give these sorts of “secret features” a name -- “Easter Eggs” because… you know… you hunt for them -- and declared that they would be putting more of these “Easter Eggs” in future games.
|
||||
|
||||
This wasn’t the first such “hidden feature” built into a piece of software (that distinction goes to an operating system for the [PDP-10][3] from 1966, but this was the first time it was given a name. And it was the first time it really grabbed the attention of most computer users and gamers.
|
||||
|
||||
Linux (and Linux related software) has not been left out. Some truly amusing Easter Eggs have been created for our beloved operating system over the years. Here are some of my personal favorites -- with how to achieve them.
|
||||
|
||||
You’ll notice, rather quickly, that most of these are experienced via a terminal. That’s on purpose. Because terminals are cool. [I should also take this moment to say that if you try to run an application I list, and you do not have it installed, it will not work. You should install it first. Because… computers.]
|
||||
|
||||
### Arch : Pac-Man in pacman ###
|
||||
|
||||
We’re going to start with one just for the [Arch Linux][4] fans out there. You can add a [Pac-Man][5]-esque character to your progress bars in “[pacman][6]” (the Arch package manager). Why this isn’t enabled by default is beyond me.
|
||||
|
||||
To do this you’ll want to edit “/etc/pacman.conf” in your favorite text editor. Under the “# Misc options” section, remove the “#” in front of “Color” and add the line “ILoveCandy”. Because Pac-Man loves candy.
|
||||
|
||||
That’s it! Next time you fire up a terminal and run pacman, you’ll help the little yellow guy get some lunch (or at least some candy).
|
||||
|
||||
### GNU Emacs : Tetris and such ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
I don’t like emacs. Not even a little bit. But it does play Tetris.
|
||||
|
||||
I have a confession to make: I don’t like [emacs][7]. Not even a little bit.
|
||||
|
||||
Some things fill my heart with gladness. Some things take away all my sadness. Some things ease my troubles. That’s [not what emacs does][8].
|
||||
|
||||
But it does play Tetris. And that’s not nothing. Here’s how:
|
||||
|
||||
Step 1) Launch emacs. (When in doubt, type “emacs”.)
|
||||
|
||||
Step 2) Hit Escape then X on your keyboard.
|
||||
|
||||
Step 3) Type “tetris” and hit Enter.
|
||||
|
||||
Bored of Tetris? Try “pong”, “snake” and a whole host of other little games (and novelties). Take a look in “/usr/share/emacs/*/lisp/play” for the full list.
|
||||
|
||||
### Animals Saying Things ###
|
||||
|
||||
The Linux world has a long and glorious history of animals saying things in a terminal. Here are the ones that are the most important to know by heart.
|
||||
|
||||
On a Debian-based distro? Try typing “apt-get moo".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
apt-get moo
|
||||
|
||||
Simple, sure. But it’s a talking cow. So we like it. Then try “aptitude moo”. It will inform you that “There are no Easter Eggs in this program”.
|
||||
|
||||
If there’s one thing you should know about [aptitude][9], it’s that it’s a dirty, filthy liar. If aptitude were wearing pants, the fire could be seen from space. Add a “-v” option to that same command. Keep adding more v’s until you force aptitude to come clean.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
I think we can all agree, that this is probably the most important feature in aptitude.
|
||||
|
||||
I think we can all agree, that this is probably the most important feature in aptitude. But what if you want to put your own words into the mouth of a cow? That’s where “cowsay” comes in.
|
||||
|
||||
And, don’t let the name “cowsay” fool you. You can put words into so much more than just a cow. Like an elephant, Calvin, Beavis and even the Ghostbusters logo. Just do a “cowsay -l” from the terminal to get a complete list of options.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can put words into so much more than just a cow.
|
||||
|
||||
Want to get really tricky? You can pipe the output of other applications into cowsay. Try “fortune | cowsay”. Lots of fun can be had.
|
||||
|
||||
### Sudo Insult Me Please ###
|
||||
|
||||
Raise your hand if you’ve always wanted your computer to insult you when you do something wrong. Hell. I know I have. Try this:
|
||||
|
||||
Type “sudo visudo” to open the “sudoers” file. In the top of that file you’ll likely see a few lines that start with “Defaults”. At the bottom of that list add “Defaults insults” and save the file.
|
||||
|
||||
Now, whenever you mistype your sudo password, your system will lob insults at you. Confidence boosting phrases such as “Listen, burrito brains, I don’t have time to listen to this trash.”, “Are you on drugs?” and “You’re mind just hasn’t been the same since the electro-shocks, has it?”.
|
||||
|
||||
This one has the side-effect of being a rather fun thing to set on a co-worker's computer.
|
||||
|
||||
### Firefox is cheeky ###
|
||||
|
||||
Here’s one that isn’t done from the Terminal! Huzzah!
|
||||
|
||||
Open up Firefox. In the URL bar type “about:about”. That will give you a list of all of the “about” pages in Firefox. Nothing too fancy there, right?
|
||||
|
||||
Now try “about:mozilla” and you’ll be greeted with a quote from the “[Book of Mozilla][10]” -- the holy book of web browsing. One of my other favorites, “about:robots”, is also quite excellent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The “Book of Mozilla” -- the holy book of web browsing.
|
||||
|
||||
### Carefully Crafted Calendar Concoctions ###
|
||||
|
||||
Tired of the boring old [Gregorian Calendar][11]? Ready to mix things up a little bit? Try typing “ddate”. This will print the current date on the [Discordian Calendar][12]. You will be greeted by something that looks like this:
|
||||
|
||||
“Today is Sweetmorn, the 18th day of Discord in the YOLD 3181”
|
||||
|
||||
I hear what you’re saying, “But, this isn’t an Easter Egg!” Shush. I’ll call it an Easter Egg if I want to.
|
||||
|
||||
### Instant l33t Hacker Mode ###
|
||||
|
||||
Want to feel like you’re a super-hacker from a movie? Try setting nmap into “[Script Kiddie][13]” mode (by adding “-oS”) and all of the output will be rendered in the most 3l33t [h@x0r-y way][14] possible.
|
||||
|
||||
Example: “nmap -oS - google.com”
|
||||
|
||||
Do it. You know you want to. Angelina Jolie would be [super impressed][15].
|
||||
|
||||
### The lolcat Rainbow ###
|
||||
|
||||
Having awesome Easter Eggs and goodies in your Linux terminal is fine and dandy… but what if you want it to have a little more… pizazz? Enter: lolcat. Take the text output of any program and pipe it through lolcat to super-duper-rainbow-ize it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Take the text output of any program and pipe it through lolcat to super-duper-rainbow-ize it.
|
||||
|
||||
### Cursor Chasing Critter ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
“Oneko” -- the Linux port of the classic “Neko”.
|
||||
|
||||
“Oneko” -- the Linux port of the classic “[Neko][16]”.
|
||||
And that brings us to “oneko” -- the Linux port of the classic “Neko”. Basically a little cat that chases your cursor around the screen.
|
||||
|
||||
While this may not qualify as an “Easter Egg” in the strictest sense of the word, it’s still fun. And it feels Easter Egg-y.
|
||||
|
||||
You can also use different options (such as “oneko -dog”) to use a little dog instead of a cat and a few other tweaks and options. Lots of possibilities for annoying co-workers with this one.
|
||||
|
||||
There you have it! A list of my favorite Linux Easter Eggs (and things of that ilk). Feel free to add your own favorite in the comments section below. Because this is the Internet. And you can do that sort of thing.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.linux.com/news/software/applications/820944-10-truly-amusing-linux-easter-eggs-
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Bryan Lunduke][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](http://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.linux.com/community/forums/person/56734
|
||||
[1]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adventure_(Atari_2600)
|
||||
[2]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Warren_Robinett
|
||||
[3]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PDP-10
|
||||
[4]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arch_Linux
|
||||
[5]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pac-Man
|
||||
[6]:http://www.linux.com/news/software/applications/820944-10-truly-amusing-linux-easter-eggs-#Pacman
|
||||
[7]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GNU_Emacs
|
||||
[8]:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AQ4NAZPi2js
|
||||
[9]:https://wiki.debian.org/Aptitude
|
||||
[10]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Book_of_Mozilla
|
||||
[11]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gregorian_calendar
|
||||
[12]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Discordian_calendar
|
||||
[13]:http://nmap.org/book/output-formats-script-kiddie.html
|
||||
[14]:http://nmap.org/book/output-formats-script-kiddie.html
|
||||
[15]:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ql1uLyuWra8
|
||||
[16]:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neko_%28computer_program%29
|
||||
@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
|
||||
Translating by Love-xuan
|
||||
Animated Wallpaper Adds Live Backgrounds To Linux Distros
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
**We know a lot of you love having a stylish Ubuntu desktop to show off.**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper
|
||||
|
||||
And as Linux makes it so easy to create a stunning workspace with a minimal effort, that’s understandable!
|
||||
|
||||
Today, we’re highlighting — [re-highlighting][2] for those of you with long memories — a free, open-source tool that can add extra bling your OS screenshots and screencasts.
|
||||
|
||||
It’s called **Live Wallpaper** and (as you can probably guess) it will replace the standard static desktop background with an animated alternative powered by OpenGL.
|
||||
|
||||
And the best bit: it can be installed in Ubuntu very easily.
|
||||
|
||||
### Animated Wallpaper Themes ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper is not the only app of this type, but it is one of the the best.
|
||||
|
||||
It comes with a number of different themes out of the box.
|
||||
|
||||
These range from the subtle (‘noise’) to frenetic (‘nexus’), and caters to everything in between. There’s even the obligatory clock wallpaper inspired by the welcome screen of the Ubuntu Phone:
|
||||
|
||||
- Circles — Clock inspired by Ubuntu Phone with ‘evolving circle’ aura
|
||||
- Galaxy — Spinning galaxy that can be resized/repositioned
|
||||
- Gradient Clock — A polar clock overlaid on basic gradient
|
||||
- Nexus — Brightly colored particles fire across screen
|
||||
- Noise — A bokeh design similar to the iOS dynamic wallpaper
|
||||
- Photoslide — Grid of photos from folder (default ~/Photos) animate in/out
|
||||
|
||||
Live Wallpaper is **fully open-source** so there’s nothing to stop imaginative artists with the know-how (and patience) from creating some slick themes of their own.
|
||||
|
||||
### Settings & Features ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each theme can be configured or customised in some way, though certain themes have more options than others.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, in Nexus (pictured above) you can change the number and colour of the the pulse particles, their size, and their frequency.
|
||||
|
||||
The preferences app also provides a set of **general options** that will apply to all themes. These include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Setting live wallpaper to run on log-in
|
||||
- Setting a custom background that the animation sits on
|
||||
- Adjusting the FPS (including option to show FPS on screen)
|
||||
- Specifying the multi-monitor behaviour
|
||||
|
||||
With so many options available it should be easy to create a background set up that suits you.
|
||||
|
||||
### Drawbacks ###
|
||||
|
||||
#### No Desktop Icons ####
|
||||
|
||||
You can’t add, open or edit files or folders on the desktop while Live Wallpaper is ‘On’.
|
||||
|
||||
The Preferences app does list an option that will, supposedly, let you do this. It may work on really older releases but in our testing, on Ubuntu 14.10, it does nothing.
|
||||
|
||||
One workaround that seems to work for some users of the app on Ubuntu is setting a .png image as the custom background. It doesn’t have to be a transparent .png, simply a .png.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Resource Usage ####
|
||||
|
||||
Animated wallpapers use more system resources than standard background images.
|
||||
|
||||
We’re not talking about 50% load at all times —at least not with this app in our testing— but those on low-power devices and laptops will want to use apps like this cautiously. Use a [system monitoring tool][2] to keep an eye on CPU and GPU load.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Quitting the app ####
|
||||
|
||||
The biggest “bug” for me is the absolute lack of “quit” option.
|
||||
|
||||
Sure, the animated wallpaper can be turned off from the Indicator Applet and the Preferences tool but quitting the app entirely, quitting the indicator applet? Nope. To do that I have to use the ‘pkill livewallpaper’ command in the Terminal.
|
||||
|
||||
### How to Install Live Wallpaper in Ubuntu 14.04 LTS + ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To install Live Wallpaper in Ubuntu 14.04 LTS and above you will first need to add the official PPA for the app to your Software Sources.
|
||||
|
||||
The quickest way to do this is using the Terminal:
|
||||
|
||||
sudo add-apt-repository ppa:fyrmir/livewallpaper-daily
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get update && sudo apt-get install livewallpaper
|
||||
|
||||
You should also install the indicator applet, which lets you quickly and easily turn on/off the animated wallpaper and switch theme from the menu area, and the GUI settings tool so that you can configure each theme based on your tastes.
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get install livewallpaper-config livewallpaper-indicator
|
||||
|
||||
When everything has installed you will be able to launch the app and its preferences tool from the Unity Dash.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Annoyingly, the Indicator Applet won’t automatically open after you install it. It does add itself to the start up list, so a quick log out > log in will get it to show.
|
||||
|
||||
### Summary ###
|
||||
|
||||
If you fancy breathing life into a dull desktop, give it a spin — and let us know what you think of it and what animated wallpapers you’d love to see added!
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2015/05/animated-wallpaper-adds-live-backgrounds-to-linux-distros
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Joey-Elijah Sneddon][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:https://plus.google.com/117485690627814051450/?rel=author
|
||||
[1]:http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2012/11/live-wallpaper-for-ubuntu
|
||||
[2]:http://www.omgubuntu.co.uk/2011/11/5-system-monitoring-tools-for-ubuntu
|
||||
@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
|
||||
Backup with these DeDuplicating Encryption Tools
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
Data is growing both in volume and value. It is becoming increasingly important to be able to back up and restore this information quickly and reliably. As society has adapted to technology and learned how to depend on computers and mobile devices, there are few that can deal with the reality of losing important data. Of firms that suffer the loss of data, 30% fold within a year, 70% cease trading within five years. This highlights the value of data.
|
||||
|
||||
With data growing in volume, improving storage utilization is pretty important. In computing, data deduplication is a specialized data compression technique for eliminating duplicate copies of repeating data. This technique therefore improves storage utilization.
|
||||
|
||||
Data is not only of interest to its creator. Governments, competitors, criminals, snoopers may be very keen to access your data. They might want to steal your data, extort money from you, or see what you are up to. Enryption is essential to protect your data.
|
||||
|
||||
So the solution is a deduplicating encrypting backup software.
|
||||
|
||||
Making file backups is an essential activity for all users, yet many users do not take adequate steps to protect their data. Whether a computer is being used in a corporate environment, or for private use, the machine's hard disk may fail without any warning signs. Alternatively, some data loss occurs as a result of human error. Without regular backups being made, data will inevitably be lost even if the services of a specialist recovery organisation are used.
|
||||
|
||||
This article provides a quick roundup of 6 deduplicating encryption backup tools.
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Attic ###
|
||||
|
||||
Attic is a deduplicating, encrypted, authenticated and compressed backup program written in Python. The main goal of Attic is to provide an efficient and secure way to backup data. The data deduplication technique used makes Attic suitable for daily backups since only the changes are stored.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Easy to use
|
||||
- Space efficient storage variable block size deduplication is used to reduce the number of bytes stored by detecting redundant data
|
||||
- Optional data encryption using 256-bit AES encryption. Data integrity and authenticity is verified using HMAC-SHA256
|
||||
- Off-site backups with SDSH
|
||||
- Backups mountable as filesystems
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [attic-backup.org][1]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Borg ###
|
||||
|
||||
Borg is a fork of Attic. It is a secure open source backup program designed for efficient data storage where only new or modified data is stored.
|
||||
|
||||
The main goal of Borg is to provide an efficient and secure way to backup data. The data deduplication technique used makes Borg suitable for daily backups since only the changes are stored. The authenticated encryption makes it suitable for backups to not fully trusted targets.
|
||||
|
||||
Borg is written in Python. Borg was created in May 2015 in response to the difficulty of getting new code or larger changes incorporated into Attic.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Easy to use
|
||||
- Space efficient storage variable block size deduplication is used to reduce the number of bytes stored by detecting redundant data
|
||||
- Optional data encryption using 256-bit AES encryption. Data integrity and authenticity is verified using HMAC-SHA256
|
||||
- Off-site backups with SDSH
|
||||
- Backups mountable as filesystems
|
||||
|
||||
Borg is not compatible with Attic.
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [borgbackup.github.io/borgbackup][2]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Obnam ###
|
||||
|
||||
Obnam (OBligatory NAMe) is an easy to use, secure Python based backup program. Backups can be stored on local hard disks, or online via the SSH SFTP protocol. The backup server, if used, does not require any special software, on top of SSH.
|
||||
|
||||
Obnam performs de-duplication by splitting up file data into chunks, and storing those individually. Generations are incremental backups; Every backup generation looks like a fresh snapshot, but is really incremental. Obnam is developed by Lars Wirzenius.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Easy to use
|
||||
- Snapshot backups
|
||||
- Data de-duplication, across files, and backup generations
|
||||
- Encrypted backups, using GnuPG
|
||||
- Backup multiple clients to a single repository
|
||||
- Backup checkpoints (creates a "save" every 100MBs or so)
|
||||
- Number of options for performance tuning including lru-size and/or upload-queue-size
|
||||
- MD5 checksum algorithm for recognising duplicate data chunks
|
||||
- Store backups to a server via SFTP
|
||||
- Supports both push (i.e. Run on the client) and pull (i.e. Run on the server) methods
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [obnam.org][3]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Duplicity ###
|
||||
|
||||
Duplicity incrementally backs up files and directory by encrypting tar-format volumes with GnuPG and uploading them to a remote (or local) file server. To transmit data it can use ssh/scp, local file access, rsync, ftp, and Amazon S3.
|
||||
|
||||
Because duplicity uses librsync, the incremental archives are space efficient and only record the parts of files that have changed since the last backup. As the software uses GnuPG to encrypt and/or sign these archives, they will be safe from spying and/or modification by the server.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently duplicity supports deleted files, full unix permissions, directories, symbolic links, fifos, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
The duplicity package also includes the rdiffdir utility. Rdiffdir is an extension of librsync's rdiff to directories; it can be used to produce signatures and deltas of directories as well as regular files.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Simple to use
|
||||
- Encrypted and signed archives (using GnuPG)
|
||||
- Bandwidth and space efficient, using the rsync algorithm
|
||||
- Standard file format
|
||||
- Choice of remote protocol
|
||||
- Local storage
|
||||
- scp/ssh
|
||||
- ftp
|
||||
- rsync
|
||||
- HSI
|
||||
- WebDAV
|
||||
- Amazon S3
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [duplicity.nongnu.org][4]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### ZBackup ###
|
||||
|
||||
ZBackup is a versatile globally-deduplicating backup tool.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Parallel LZMA or LZO compression of the stored data. You can mix LZMA and LZO in a repository
|
||||
- Built-in AES encryption of the stored data
|
||||
- Possibility to delete old backup data
|
||||
- Use of a 64-bit rolling hash, keeping the amount of soft collisions to zero
|
||||
- Repository consists of immutable files. No existing files are ever modified
|
||||
- Written in C++ only with only modest library dependencies
|
||||
- Safe to use in production
|
||||
- Possibility to exchange data between repos without recompression
|
||||
- Uses a 64-bit modified Rabin-Karp rolling hash
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [zbackup.org][5]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### bup ###
|
||||
|
||||
bup is a program written in Python that backs things up. It's short for "backup". It provides an efficient way to backup a system based on the git packfile format, providing fast incremental saves and global deduplication (among and within files, including virtual machine images).
|
||||
|
||||
bup is released under the LGPL version 2 license.
|
||||
|
||||
Features include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Global deduplication (among and within files, including virtual machine images)
|
||||
- Uses a rolling checksum algorithm (similar to rsync) to split large files into chunks
|
||||
- Uses the packfile format from git
|
||||
- Writes packfiles directly offering fast incremental saves
|
||||
- Can use "par2" redundancy to recover corrupted backups
|
||||
- Mount your bup repository as a FUSE filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
Website: [bup.github.io][6]
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.linuxlinks.com/article/20150628060000607/BackupTools.html
|
||||
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:https://attic-backup.org/
|
||||
[2]:https://borgbackup.github.io/borgbackup/
|
||||
[3]:http://obnam.org/
|
||||
[4]:http://duplicity.nongnu.org/
|
||||
[5]:http://zbackup.org/
|
||||
[6]:https://bup.github.io/
|
||||
@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
|
||||
sevenot translating
|
||||
First Stable Version Of Atom Code Editor Has Been Released
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[Atom 1.0][1] is here. One of the [best open source code editors][2], [Atom][3] was available for public uses for almost a year but this is the first stable version of the most talked about text/code editor of recent times. Promoted as the “hackable text editor for 21st century”, this project of [Github][4] has already been downloaded 1.5 million times in the past and currently it has over 350,000 monthly active users.
|
||||
|
||||
### It’s been a long time ###
|
||||
|
||||
Rome was not built in a day and neither was Atom. Since it was first conceptualized in 2008 till the first stable release this month, it has taken several years and hundreds of contributors from across the globe, along with main developers working on Atom core. A quick look at the journey of Atom can be seen in the picture below:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Image credit: Atom
|
||||
|
||||
### Back to the future ###
|
||||
|
||||
This launch of Atom 1.0 is announced with a retro video showing the capabilities of the editor. Resembling to 70’s science fiction TV series, this will be the coolest video you are going to watch today :)
|
||||
|
||||
注：youtube视频，不行做个链接吧
|
||||
<iframe width="640" height="390" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen="true" src="http://www.youtube.com/embed/Y7aEiVwBAdk?version=3&rel=1&fs=1&showsearch=0&showinfo=1&iv_load_policy=1&wmode=transparent" type="text/html" class="youtube-player"></iframe>
|
||||
|
||||
### Features of Atom text editor ###
|
||||
|
||||
- Cross-platform editing
|
||||
- Built-in package manager
|
||||
- Smart autocompletion
|
||||
- File system browser
|
||||
- Multiple panes
|
||||
- Find and replace
|
||||
- Highly customizable
|
||||
- Modern look
|
||||
|
||||
### Get Atom 1.0 ###
|
||||
|
||||
Atom 1.0 is available for Linux, Windows and Mac OS X. For Debian based Linux distributions such as Ubuntu and Linux Mint, Atom provides .deb binaries. For Fedora, it also has .rpm binaries. You can also get the source code, if you like. The links below will let you download the latest stable version.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Atom .deb][5]
|
||||
- [Atom .rpm][6]
|
||||
- [Atom Source Code][7]
|
||||
|
||||
If you prefer, you can [install Atom in Ubuntu using PPA][8]. The PPA is not official though.
|
||||
|
||||
注：下面是一个调查，可以发布的时候在文章内发布个调查
|
||||
|
||||
#### Are you excited about Atom? ####
|
||||
|
||||
- Oh Yes! This is the best thing that could happen to programmers.
|
||||
- Not really. I have seen better editors.
|
||||
- Don't care. My default text editor does the job just fine.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/atom-stable-released/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://blog.atom.io/2015/06/25/atom-1-0.html
|
||||
[2]:http://itsfoss.com/best-modern-open-source-code-editors-for-linux/
|
||||
[3]:https://atom.io/
|
||||
[4]:https://github.com/
|
||||
[5]:https://atom.io/download/deb
|
||||
[6]:https://atom.io/download/rpm
|
||||
[7]:https://github.com/atom/atom/blob/master/docs/build-instructions/linux.md
|
||||
[8]:http://itsfoss.com/install-atom-text-editor-ubuntu-1404-linux-mint-17/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
4 CCleaner Alternatives For Ubuntu Linux
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Back in my Windows days, [CCleaner][1] was my favorite tool for freeing up space, delete junk files and speed up Windows. I know I am not the only one who looked for CCleaner for Linux when switched from Windows. If you are looking for CCleaner alternative in Linux, I am going to list here four such application that you can use to clean up Ubuntu or Ubuntu based Linux distributions. But before we see the list, let’s ponder over whether Linux requires system clean up tools or not.
|
||||
|
||||
### Does Linux need system clean up utilities like CCleaner? ###
|
||||
|
||||
To get this answer, let’s first see what does CCleaner do. As per [How-To Geek][2]:
|
||||
|
||||
> CCleaner has two main uses. One, it scans for and deletes useless files, freeing up space. Two, it erases private data like your browsing history and list of most recently opened files in various programs.
|
||||
|
||||
So in short, it performs a system wide clean up of temporary file be it in your web browser or in your media player. You might know that Windows has the affection for keeping junk files in the system for like since ever but what about Linux? What does it do with the temporary files?
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike Windows, Linux cleans up all the temporary files (store in /tmp) automatically. You don’t have registry in Linux which further reduces the headache. At worst, you might have some broken packages, packages that are not needed anymore and internet browsing history, cookies and cache.
|
||||
|
||||
### Does it mean that Linux does not need system clean up utilities? ###
|
||||
|
||||
- Answer is no if you can run few commands for occasional package cleaning, manually deleting browser history etc.
|
||||
- Answer is yes if you don’t want to run from places to places and want one tool to rule them all where you can clean up all the suggested things in one (or few) click(s).
|
||||
|
||||
If you have got your answer as yes, let’s move on to see some CCleaner like utilities to clean up your Ubuntu Linux.
|
||||
|
||||
### CCleaner alternatives for Ubuntu ###
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that I am using Ubuntu here because some tools discussed here are only existing for Ubuntu based Linux distributions while some are available for all Linux distributions.
|
||||
|
||||
#### 1. BleachBit ####
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[BleachBit][3] is cross platform app available for both Windows and Linux. It has a long list of applications that it support for cleaning and thus giving you option for cleaning cache, cookies and log files. A quick look at its feature:
|
||||
|
||||
- Simple GUI check the boxes you want, preview it and delete it.
|
||||
- Multi-platform: Linux and Windows
|
||||
- Free and open source
|
||||
- Shred files to hide their contents and prevent data recovery
|
||||
- Overwrite free disk space to hide previously deleted files
|
||||
- Command line interface also available
|
||||
|
||||
BleachBit is available by default in Ubuntu 14.04 and 15.04. You can install it using the command below in terminal:
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get install bleachbit
|
||||
|
||||
BleachBit has binaries available for all major Linux distributions. You can download BleachBit from the link below:
|
||||
|
||||
- [Download BleachBit for Linux][4]
|
||||
|
||||
#### 2. Sweeper ####
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Sweeper is a system clean up utility which is a part of [KDE SC utilities][5] module. It’s main features are:
|
||||
|
||||
- remove web-related traces: cookies, history, cache
|
||||
- remove the image thumbnails cache
|
||||
- clean the applications and documentes history
|
||||
|
||||
Sweeper is available by default in Ubuntu repository. Use the command below in a terminal to install Sweeper:
|
||||
|
||||
sudo apt-get install sweeper
|
||||
|
||||
#### 3. Ubuntu Tweak ####
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
As the name suggests, [Ubuntu Tweak][6] is more of a tweaking tool than a cleaning utility. But along with tweaking things like compiz settings, panel configuration, start up program control, power management etc, Ubuntu Tweak also provides a Janitor tab that lets you:
|
||||
|
||||
- clean browser cache
|
||||
- clean Ubuntu Software Center cache
|
||||
- clean thumbnail cache
|
||||
- clan apt repository cache
|
||||
- clean old kernel files
|
||||
- clean package configs
|
||||
|
||||
You can get the .deb installer for Ubuntu Tweak from the link below:
|
||||
|
||||
- [Download Ubuntu Tweak][7]
|
||||
|
||||
#### 4. GCleaner (beta) ####
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
One of the third party apps for elementaryOS Freya, GCleaner aims to be CCleaner in GNU world. The interface resembles heavily to CCleaner. Some of the main features of GCleaner are:
|
||||
|
||||
- clean browser history
|
||||
- clean app cache
|
||||
- clean packages and configs
|
||||
- clean recent document history
|
||||
- empty recycle bin
|
||||
|
||||
At the time of writing this article, GCleaner is in heavy development. You can check the project website and get the source code to build and use GCleaner.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Know More About GCleaner][8]
|
||||
|
||||
### Your choice? ###
|
||||
|
||||
I have listed down the possibilities to you. I let you decide which tool you would use to clean Ubuntu 14.04. But I am certain that if you were looking for a CCleaner like application, one of these four end your search.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/ccleaner-alternatives-ubuntu-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:https://www.piriform.com/ccleaner/download
|
||||
[2]:http://www.howtogeek.com/172820/beginner-geek-what-does-ccleaner-do-and-should-you-use-it/
|
||||
[3]:http://bleachbit.sourceforge.net/
|
||||
[4]:http://bleachbit.sourceforge.net/download/linux
|
||||
[5]:https://www.kde.org/applications/utilities/
|
||||
[6]:http://ubuntu-tweak.com/
|
||||
[7]:http://ubuntu-tweak.com/
|
||||
[8]:https://quassy.github.io/elementary-apps/GCleaner/
|
||||
@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
|
||||
Translating by H-mudcup
|
||||
|
||||
Defending the Free Linux World
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
@ -122,4 +124,4 @@ via: http://www.linuxinsider.com/story/Defending-the-Free-Linux-World-81512.html
|
||||
[2]:http://www.redhat.com/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.law.uh.edu/
|
||||
[4]:http://www.chaoticmoon.com/
|
||||
[5]:http://www.ieee.org/
|
||||
[5]:http://www.ieee.org/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
|
||||
sevenot translating
|
||||
10 Top Distributions in Demand to Get Your Dream Job
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
We are coming up with a series of five articles which aims at making you aware of the top skills which will help you in getting yours dream job. In this competitive world you can not rely on one skill. You need to have balanced set of skills. There is no measure of a balanced skill set except a few conventions and statistics which changes from time-to-time.
|
||||
|
||||
125
sources/talk/20150716 Interview--Larry Wall.md
Normal file
125
sources/talk/20150716 Interview--Larry Wall.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
|
||||
Interview: Larry Wall
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
> Perl 6 has been 15 years in the making, and is now due to be released at the end of this year. We speak to its creator to find out what’s going on.
|
||||
|
||||
Larry Wall is a fascinating man. He’s the creator of Perl, a programming language that’s widely regarded as the glue holding the internet together, and mocked by some as being a “write-only” language due to its density and liberal use of non-alphanumeric characters. Larry also has a background in linguistics, and is well known for delivering entertaining “State of the Onion” presentations about the future of Perl.
|
||||
|
||||
At FOSDEM 2015 in Brussels, we caught up with Larry to ask him why Perl 6 has taken so long (Perl 5 was released in 1994), how difficult it is to manage a project when everyone has strong opinions and pulling in different directions, and how his background in linguistics influenced the design of Perl from the start. Get ready for some intriguing diversions…
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**Linux Voice: You once had a plan to go and find an undocumented language somewhere in the world and create a written script for it, but you never had the opportunity to fulfil this plan. Is that something you’d like to go back and do now?**
|
||||
|
||||
Larry Wall: You have to be kind of young to be able to carry that off! It’s actually a lot of hard work, and organisations that do these things don’t tend to take people in when they’re over a certain age. Partly this is down to health and vigour, but also because people are much better at picking up new languages when they’re younger, and you have to learn the language before making a script for it.
|
||||
|
||||
I started trying to teach myself Japanese about 10 years ago, and I could speak it quite well, because of my phonology and phonetics training – but it’s very hard for me to understand what anybody says. So I can go to Japan and ask for directions, but I can’t really understand the answers!
|
||||
|
||||
> “With Perl 6, we found some ways to make the computer more sure about what the user is talking about.”
|
||||
|
||||
So usually learning a language well enough to develop a writing system, and to at least be conversational in the language, takes some period of years before you can get to the point where you can actually do literacy and start educating people on their own culture, as it were. And then you teach them to write about their own culture as well.
|
||||
|
||||
Of course, if you have language helpers – and we were told not to call them “language informants”, or everyone would think we were working for the CIA! – if you have these people, you can get them to come in and help you learn the foreign language. They are not teachers but there are ways of eliciting things from someone who’s not a language teacher – they can still teach you how to speak. They can take a stick and point to it and say “that’s a stick”, and drop it and say “the stick falls”. Then you start writing things down and systematising things.
|
||||
|
||||
The motivation that most people have, going out to these groups, is to translate the Bible into their languages. But that’s only one part of it; the other is also culture preservation. Missionaries get kind of a bad rep on that, because anthropologists think they should be left to sit their in their own culture. But somebody is probably going to change their culture anyway – it’s usually the army, or businesses coming in, like Coca Cola or the sewing machine people, or missionaries. And of those three, the missionaries are the least damaging, if they’re doing their job right.
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: Many writing systems are based on existing scripts, and then you have invented ones like Greenlandic…**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: The Cherokee invented their own just by copying letters, and they have no mapping much to what we think of letters, and it’s fairly arbitrary in that sense. It just has to represent how the people themselves think of the language, and sufficiently well to communicate. Often there will be variations on Western orthography, using characters from Latin where possible. Tonal languages have to mark the tones somehow, by accents or by numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
As soon as you start leaning towards a phoenetic or phonological representation, then you also start to lose dialectical differences – or you have to write the dialectal differences. Or you have conventional spelling like we have in English, but pronunciation that doesn’t really match it.
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: When you started working on Perl, what did you take from your background in linguistics that made you think: “this is really important in a programming language”?**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: I thought a lot about how people use languages. In real languages, you have a system of nouns and verbs and adjectives, and you kind of know which words are which type. And in real natural languages, you have a lot of instances of shoving one word into a different slot. The linguistic theory I studied was called tagmemics, and it accounts for how this works in a natural language – that you could have something that you think of as a noun, but you can verb it, and people do that all time.
|
||||
|
||||
You can pretty much shove anything in any slot, and you can communicate. One of my favourite examples is shoving an entire sentence in as an adjective. The sentence goes like this: “I don’t like your I-can-use-anything-as-an-adjective attitude”!
|
||||
|
||||
So natural language is very flexible this way because you have a very intelligent listener – or at least, compared with a computer – who you can rely on to figure out what you must have meant, in case of ambiguity. Of course, in a computer language you have to manage the ambiguity much more closely.
|
||||
|
||||
Arguably in Perl 1 through to 5 we didn’t manage it quite adequately enough. Sometimes the computer was confused when it really shouldn’t be. With Perl 6, we discovered some ways to make the computer more sure about what the user is talking about, even if the user is confused about whether something is really a string or a number. The computer knows the exact type of it. We figured out ways of having stronger typing internally but still have the allomorphic “you can use this as that” idea.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: For a long time Perl was seen as the “glue” language of the internet, for fitting bits and pieces together. Do you see Perl 6 as a release to satisfy the needs of existing users, or as a way to bring in new people, and bring about a resurgence in the language?**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: The initial intent was to make a better Perl for Perl programmers. But as we looked at the some of the inadequacies of Perl 5, it became apparent that if we fixed these inadequacies, Perl 6 would be more applicable, as I mentioned in my talk – like how J. R. R. Tolkien talked about applicability [see http://tinyurl.com/nhpr8g2].
|
||||
|
||||
The idea that “easy things should be easy and hard things should be possible” goes way back, to the boundary between Perl 2 and Perl 3. In Perl 2, we couldn’t handle binary data or embedded nulls – it was just C-style strings. I said then that “Perl is just a text processing language – you don’t need those things in a text processing language”.
|
||||
|
||||
But it occurred to me at the time that there were a large number of problems that were mostly text, and had a little bit of binary data in them – network addresses and things like that. You use binary data to open the socket but then text to process it. So the applicability of the language more than doubled by making it possible to handle binary data.
|
||||
|
||||
That began a trade-off about what things should be easy in a language. Nowadays we have a principle in Perl, and we stole the phrase Huffman coding for it, from the bit encoding system where you have different sizes for characters. Common characters are encoded in a fewer number of bits, and rarer characters are encoded in more bits.
|
||||
|
||||
> “There had to be a very careful balancing act. There were just so many good ideas at the beginning.”
|
||||
|
||||
We stole that idea as a general principle for Perl, for things that are commonly used, or when you have to type them very often – the common things need to be shorter or more succinct. Another bit of that, however, is that they’re allowed to be more irregular. In natural language, it’s actually the most commonly used verbs that tend to be the most irregular.
|
||||
|
||||
And there’s a reason for that, because you need more differentiation of them. One of my favourite books is called The Search for the Perfect Language by Umberto Eco, and it’s not about computer languages; it’s about philosophical languages, and the whole idea that maybe some ancient language was the perfect language and we should get back to it.
|
||||
|
||||
All of those languages make the mistake of thinking that similar things should always be encoded similarly. But that’s not how you communicate. If you have a bunch of barnyard animals, and they all have related names, and you say “Go out and kill the Blerfoo”, but you really wanted them to kill the Blerfee, you might get a cow killed when you want a chicken killed.
|
||||
|
||||
So in realms like that it’s actually better to differentiate the words, for more redundancy in the communication channel. The common words need to have more of that differentiation. It’s all about communicating efficiently, and then there’s also this idea of self-clocking codes. If you look at a UPC label on a product – a barcode – that’s actually a self-clocking code where each pair of bars and spaces is always in a unit of seven columns wide. You rely on that – you know the width of the bars will always add up to that. So it’s self-clocking.
|
||||
|
||||
There are other self-clocking codes used in electronics. In the old transmission serial protocols there were stop and start bits so you could keep things synced up. Natural languages also do this. For instance, in the writing of Japanese, they don’t use spaces. Because the way they write it, they will have a Kanji character from Chinese at the head of each phrase, and then the endings are written in the a syllabary.
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: Hiragana, right?**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: Yes, Hiragana. So naturally the head of each phrase really stands out with this system. Similarly, in ancient Greek, most of the verbs were declined or conjugated. So they had standard endings were sort-of a clocking mechanism. Spaces were optional in their writing system as well – it was a more modern invention to put the spaces in.
|
||||
|
||||
So similarly in computer languages, there’s value in having a self-clocking code. We rely on this heavily in Perl, and even more heavily in Perl 6 than in previous releases. The idea that when you’re parsing an expression, you’re either expecting a term or an infix operator. When you’re expecting a term you might also get a prefix operator – that’s kind-of in the same expectation slot – and when you’re expecting an infix you might also get a postfix for the previous term.
|
||||
|
||||
But it flips back and forth. And if the compiler actually knows which it is expecting, you can overload those a little bit, and Perl does this. So a slash when it’s expecting a term will introduce a regular expression, whereas a slash when you’re expecting an infix will be division. On the other hand, we don’t want to overload everything, because then you lose the self-clocking redundancy.
|
||||
|
||||
Most of our best error messages, for syntax errors, actually come out of noticing that you have two terms in a row. And then we try to figure out why there are two terms in a row – “oh, you must have left a semicolon out on the previous line”. So we can produce much better error messages than the more ad-hoc parsers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: Why has Perl 6 taken fifteen years? It must be hard overseeing a language when everyone has different opinions about things, and there’s not always the right way to do things, and the wrong way.**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: There had to be a very careful balancing act. There were just so many good ideas at the beginning – well, I don’t want to say they were all good ideas. There were so many pain points, like there were 361 RFCs [feature proposal documents] when I expected maybe 20. We had to sit back and actually look at them all, and ignore the proposed solutions, because they were all over the map and all had tunnel vision. Each one many have just changed one thing, but if we had done them all, it would’ve been a complete mess.
|
||||
|
||||
So we had to re-rationalise based on how people were actually hurting when they tried to use Perl 5. We started to look at the unifying, underlying ideas. Many of these RFCs were based on the fact that we had an inadequate type system. By introducing a more coherent type system we could fix many problems in a sane fashion and a cohesive fashion.
|
||||
|
||||
And we started noticing other ways how we could unify the featuresets and start reusing ideas in different areas. Not necessarily that they were the same thing underneath. We have a standard way of writing pairs – well, two ways in Perl! But the way of writing pairs with a colon could also be reused for radix notation, or for literal numbers in any base. It could also be used for various alternative forms of quoting. We say in Perl that it’s “strangely consistent”.
|
||||
|
||||
> “People who made early implementations of Perl 6 came back to me, cap in hand, and said “We really need a language designer.””
|
||||
|
||||
Similar ideas pop up, and you say “I’m already familiar with how that syntax works, but I see it’s being used for something else”. So it took some unity of vision to find these unifications. People who had the various ideas and made early implementations of Perl 6 came back to me, cap-in-hand, and said “We really need a language designer. Could you be our benevolent dictator?”
|
||||
|
||||
So I was the language designer, but I was almost explicitly told: “Stay out of the implementation! We saw what you did made out of Perl 5, and we don’t like it!” It was really funny because the innards of the new implementation started looking a whole lot like Perl 5 inside, and maybe that’s why some of the early implementations didn’t work well.
|
||||
|
||||
Because we were still feeling our way into the whole design, the implementations made a lot of assumptions about what VM should do and shouldn’t do, so we ended up with something like an object oriented assembly language. That sort of problem was fairly pervasive at the beginning. Then the Pugs guys came along and said “Let’s use Haskell, because it makes you think very clearly about what you’re doing. Let’s use it to clarify our semantic model underneath.”
|
||||
|
||||
So we nailed down some of those semantic models, but more importantly, we started building the test suite at that point, to be consistent with those semantic models. Then after that, the Parrot VM continued developing, and then another implementation, Niecza, came along and it was based on .NET. It was by a young fellow who was very smart and implemented a large subset of Perl 6, but he was kind of a loner, didn’t really figure out a way to get other people involved in his project.
|
||||
|
||||
At the same time the Parrot project was getting too big for anyone to really manage it inside, and very difficult to refactor. At that point the fellows working on Rakudo decided that we probably needed to be on more platforms than just the Parrot VM. So they invented a portability layer called NQP which stands for “Not Quite Perl”. They ported it to first of all run on the JVM (Java Virtual Machine), and while they were doing that they were also secretly working on a new VM called MoarVM. That became public a little over a year ago.
|
||||
|
||||
Both MoarVM and JVM run a pretty much equivalent set of regression tests – Parrot is kind-of trailing back in some areas. So that has been very good to flush out VM-specific assumptions, and we’re starting to think about NQP targeting other things. There was a Google Summer of Code project year to target NQP to JavaScript, and that might fit right in, because MoarVM also uses Node.js for much of its more mundane processing.
|
||||
|
||||
We probably need to concentrate on MoarVM for the rest of this year, until we actually define 6.0, and then the rest will catch up.
|
||||
|
||||
**LV: Last year in the UK, the government kicked off the Year of Code, an attempt to get young people interested in programming. There are lots of opinions about how this should be done – like whether you should teach low-level languages at the start, so that people really understand memory usage, or a high-level language. What’s your take on that?**
|
||||
|
||||
LW: Up until now, the Python community has done a much better job of getting into the lower levels of education than we have. We’d like to do something in that space too, and that’s partly why we have the butterfly logo, because it’s going to be appealing to seven year old girls!
|
||||
|
||||
But we do think that Perl 6 will be learnable as a first language. A number of people have surprised us by learning Perl 5 as their first language. And you know, there are a number of fairly powerful concepts even in Perl 5, like closures, lexical scoping, and features you generally get from functional programming. Even more so in Perl 6.
|
||||
|
||||
> “Until now, the Python community has done a much better job of getting into the lower levels of education.”
|
||||
|
||||
Part of the reason the Perl 6 has taken so long is that we have around 50 different principles we try to stick to, and in language design you’re end up juggling everything and saying “what’s really the most important principle here”? There has been a lot of discussion about a lot of different things. Sometimes we commit to a decision, work with it for a while, and then realise it wasn’t quite the right decision.
|
||||
|
||||
We didn’t design or specify pretty much anything about concurrent programming until someone came along who was smart enough about it and knew what the different trade-offs were, and that’s Jonathan Worthington. He has blended together ideas from other languages like Go and C#, with concurrent primitives that compose well. Composability is important in the rest of the language.
|
||||
|
||||
There are an awful lot of concurrent and parallel programming systems that don’t compose well – like threads and locks, and there have been lots of ways to do it poorly. So in one sense, it’s been worth waiting this extra time to see some of these languages like Go and C# develop really good high-level primitives – that’s sort of a contradiction in terms – that compose well.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.linuxvoice.com/interview-larry-wall/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Mike Saunders][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.linuxvoice.com/author/mike/
|
||||
@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
|
||||
XLCYun translating.
|
||||
Syncthing: A Private, And Secure Tool To Sync Files/Folders Between Computers
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
### Introduction ###
|
||||
@ -204,4 +205,4 @@ via: http://www.unixmen.com/syncthing-private-secure-tool-sync-filesfolders-comp
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.unixmen.com/author/sk/
|
||||
[1]:https://github.com/syncthing/syncthing/releases/tag/v0.10.20
|
||||
[2]:http://syncthing.net/
|
||||
[2]:http://syncthing.net/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,359 +0,0 @@
|
||||
PHP Security
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Introduction ###
|
||||
|
||||
When offering an Internet service, you must always keep security in mind as you develop your code. It may appear that most PHP scripts aren't sensitive to security concerns; this is mainly due to the large number of inexperienced programmers working in the language. However, there is no reason for you to have an inconsistent security policy based on a rough guess at your code's significance. The moment you put anything financially interesting on your server, it becomes likely that someone will try to casually hack it. Create a forum program or any sort of shopping cart, and the probability of attack rises to a dead certainty.
|
||||
|
||||
### Background ###
|
||||
|
||||
Here are a few general security guidelines for securing your web content:
|
||||
|
||||
#### Don't trust forms ####
|
||||
|
||||
Hacking forms is trivial. Yes, by using a silly JavaScript trick, you may be able to limit your form to allow only the numbers 1 through 5 in a rating field. The moment someone turns JavaScript off in their browser or posts custom form data, your client-side validation flies out the window.
|
||||
|
||||
Users interact with your scripts primarily through form parameters, and therefore they're the biggest security risk. What's the lesson? Always validate the data that gets passed to any PHP script in the PHP script. In this article, we show you how to analyze and protect against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks, which can hijack your user's credentials (and worse). You'll also see how to prevent the MySQL injection attacks that can taint or destroy your data.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Don't trust users ####
|
||||
|
||||
Assume that every piece of data your website gathers is laden with harmful code. Sanitize every piece, even if you're positive that nobody would ever try to attack your site.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Turn off global variables ####
|
||||
|
||||
The biggest security hole you can have is having the register_globals configuration parameter enabled. Mercifully, it's turned off by default in PHP 4.2 and later. If **register_globals** is on, then you can disable this feature by turning the register_globals variable to Off in your server's php.ini file :
|
||||
|
||||
register_globals = Off
|
||||
|
||||
Novice programmers view registered globals as a convenience, but they don't realize how dangerous this setting is. A server with global variables enabled automatically assigns global variables to any form parameters. For an idea of how this works and why this is dangerous, let's look at an example.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's say that you have a script named process.php that enters form data into your user database. The original form looked like this:
|
||||
|
||||
<input name="username" type="text" size="15" maxlength="64">
|
||||
|
||||
When running process.php, PHP with registered globals enabled places the value of this parameter into the $username variable. This saves some typing over accessing them through **$_POST['username']** or **$_GET['username']**. Unfortunately, this also leaves you open to security problems, because PHP sets a variable for any value sent to the script via a GET or POST parameter, and that is a big problem if you didn't explicitly initialize the variable and you don't want someone to manipulate it.
|
||||
|
||||
Take the script below, for example—if the $authorized variable is true, it shows confidential data to the user. Under normal circumstances, the $authorized variable is set to true only if the user has been properly authenticated via the hypothetical authenticated_user() function. But if you have **register_globals** active, anyone could send a GET parameter such as authorized=1 to override this:
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
// Define $authorized = true only if user is authenticated
|
||||
if (authenticated_user()) {
|
||||
$authorized = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
The moral of the story is that you should pull form data from predefined server variables. All data passed on to your web page via a posted form is automatically stored in a large array called $_POST, and all GET data is stored in a large array called **$_GET**. File upload information is stored in a special array called $_FILES. In addition, there is a combined variable called $_REQUEST.
|
||||
|
||||
To access the username field from a POST method form, use **$_POST['username']**. Use **$_GET['username']** if the username is in the URL. If you don't care where the value came from, use **$_REQUEST['username']**.
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$post_value = $_POST['post_value'];
|
||||
$get_value = $_GET['get_value'];
|
||||
$some_variable = $_REQUEST['some_value'];
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
$_REQUEST is a union of the $_GET, $_POST, and $_COOKIE arrays. If you have two or more values of the same parameter name, be careful of which one PHP uses. The default order is cookie, POST, then GET.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Recommended Security Configuration Options ####
|
||||
|
||||
There are several PHP configuration settings that affect security features. Here are the ones that should obviously be used for production servers:
|
||||
|
||||
- **register_globals** set to off
|
||||
- **safe_mode** set to off
|
||||
- **error_reporting** set to off. This is visible error reporting that sends a message to the user's browser if something goes wrong. For production servers, use error logging instead. Development servers can enable error logging as long as they're behind a firewall.
|
||||
- Disable these functions: system(), exec(), passthru(), shell_exec(), proc_open(), and popen().
|
||||
- **open_basedir** set for both the /tmp directory (so that session information can be stored) and the web root so that scripts cannot access files outside a selected area.
|
||||
- **expose_php** set to off. This feature adds a PHP signature that includes the version number to the Apache headers.
|
||||
- **allow_url_fopen** set to off. This isn't strictly necessary if you're careful about how you access files in your code—that is, you validate all input parameters.
|
||||
- **allow_url_include** set to off. There's really no sane reason for anyone to want to access include files via HTTP.
|
||||
|
||||
In general, if you find code that wants to use these features, you shouldn't trust it. Be especially careful of anything that wants to use a function such as system()—it's almost certainly flawed.
|
||||
|
||||
With these settings now behind us, let's look at some specific attacks and the methods that will help you protect your server.
|
||||
|
||||
### SQL Injection Attacks ###
|
||||
|
||||
Because the queries that PHP passes to MySQL databases are written in the powerful SQL programming language, you run the risk of someone attempting an SQL injection attack by using MySQL in web query parameters. By inserting malicious SQL code fragments into form parameters, an attacker attempts to break into (or disable) your server.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's say that you have a form parameter that you eventually place into a variable named $product, and you create some SQL like this:
|
||||
|
||||
$sql = "select * from pinfo where product = '$product'";
|
||||
|
||||
If that parameter came straight from the form, use database-specific escapes with PHP's native functions, like this:
|
||||
|
||||
$sql = 'Select * from pinfo where product = '"'
|
||||
mysql_real_escape_string($product) . '"';
|
||||
|
||||
If you don't, someone might just decide to throw this fragment into the form parameter:
|
||||
|
||||
39'; DROP pinfo; SELECT 'FOO
|
||||
|
||||
Then the result of $sql is:
|
||||
|
||||
select product from pinfo where product = '39'; DROP pinfo; SELECT 'FOO'
|
||||
|
||||
Because the semicolon is MySQL's statement delimiter, the database processes these three statements:
|
||||
|
||||
select * from pinfo where product = '39'
|
||||
DROP pinfo
|
||||
SELECT 'FOO'
|
||||
|
||||
Well, there goes your table.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this particular syntax won't actually work with PHP and MySQL, because the **mysql_query()** function allows just one statement to be processed per request. However, a subquery will still work.
|
||||
|
||||
To prevent SQL injection attacks, do two things:
|
||||
|
||||
- Always validate all parameters. For example, if something needs to be a number, make sure that it's a number.
|
||||
- Always use the mysql_real_escape_string() function on data to escape any quotes or double quotes in your data.
|
||||
|
||||
**Note: To automatically escape any form data, you can turn on Magic Quotes.**
|
||||
|
||||
Some MySQL damage can be avoided by restricting your MySQL user privileges. Any MySQL account can be restricted to only do certain kinds of queries on selected tables. For example, you could create a MySQL user who can select rows but nothing else. However, this is not terribly useful for dynamic data, and, furthermore, if you have sensitive customer information, it might be possible for someone to have access to some data that you didn't intend to make available. For example, a user accessing account data could try to inject some code that accesses another account number instead of the one assigned to the current session.
|
||||
|
||||
### Preventing Basic XSS Attacks ###
|
||||
|
||||
XSS stands for cross-site scripting. Unlike most attacks, this exploit works on the client side. The most basic form of XSS is to put some JavaScript in user-submitted content to steal the data in a user's cookie. Since most sites use cookies and sessions to identify visitors, the stolen data can then be used to impersonate that user—which is deeply troublesome when it's a typical user account, and downright disastrous if it's the administrative account. If you don't use cookies or session IDs on your site, your users aren't vulnerable, but you should still be aware of how this attack works.
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike MySQL injection attacks, XSS attacks are difficult to prevent. Yahoo!, eBay, Apple, and Microsoft have all been affected by XSS. Although the attack doesn't involve PHP, you can use PHP to strip user data in order to prevent attacks. To stop an XSS attack, you have to restrict and filter the data a user submits to your site. It is for this precise reason that most online bulletin boards don't allow the use of HTML tags in posts and instead replace them with custom tag formats such as **[b]** and **[linkto]**.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's look at a simple script that illustrates how to prevent some of these attacks. For a more complete solution, use SafeHTML, discussed later in this article.
|
||||
|
||||
function transform_HTML($string, $length = null) {
|
||||
// Helps prevent XSS attacks
|
||||
// Remove dead space.
|
||||
$string = trim($string);
|
||||
// Prevent potential Unicode codec problems.
|
||||
$string = utf8_decode($string);
|
||||
// HTMLize HTML-specific characters.
|
||||
$string = htmlentities($string, ENT_NOQUOTES);
|
||||
$string = str_replace("#", "#", $string);
|
||||
$string = str_replace("%", "%", $string);
|
||||
$length = intval($length);
|
||||
if ($length > 0) {
|
||||
$string = substr($string, 0, $length);
|
||||
}
|
||||
return $string;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
This function transforms HTML-specific characters into HTML literals. A browser renders any HTML run through this script as text with no markup. For example, consider this HTML string:
|
||||
|
||||
<STRONG>Bold Text</STRONG>
|
||||
|
||||
Normally, this HTML would render as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
Bold Text
|
||||
|
||||
However, when run through **transform_HTML()**, it renders as the original input. The reason is that the tag characters are HTML entities in the processed string. The resulting string from **HTML()** in plaintext looks like this:
|
||||
|
||||
<STRONG>Bold Text</STRONG>
|
||||
|
||||
The essential piece of this function is the htmlentities() function call that transforms <, >, and & into their entity equivalents of **<**, **>**, and **&**. Although this takes care of the most common attacks, experienced XSS hackers have another sneaky trick up their sleeve: Encoding their malicious scripts in hexadecimal or UTF-8 instead of normal ASCII text, hoping to circumvent your filters. They can send the code along as a GET variable in the URL, saying, "Hey, this is hexadecimal code, but could you run it for me anyway?" A hexadecimal example looks something like this:
|
||||
|
||||
<a href="http://host/a.php?variable=%22%3e %3c%53%43%52%49%50%54%3e%44%6f%73%6f%6d%65%74%68%69%6e%67%6d%61%6c%69%63%69%6f%75%73%3c%2f%53%43%52%49%50%54%3e">
|
||||
|
||||
But when the browser renders that information, it turns out to be:
|
||||
|
||||
<a href="http://host/a.php?variable="> <SCRIPT>Dosomethingmalicious</SCRIPT>
|
||||
|
||||
To prevent this, transform_HTML() takes the additional steps of converting # and % signs into their entity, shutting down hex attacks, and converting UTF-8–encoded data.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, just in case someone tries to overload a string with a very long input, hoping to crash something, you can add an optional $length parameter to trim the string to the maximum length you specify.
|
||||
|
||||
### Using SafeHTML ###
|
||||
|
||||
The problem with the previous script is that it is simple, and it does not allow for any kind of user markup. Unfortunately, there are hundreds of ways to try to sneak JavaScript past someone's filters, and short of stripping all HTML from someone's input, there's no way of stopping it.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently, there's no single script that's guaranteed to be unbreakable, though there are some that are better than most. There are two approaches to security, whitelisting and blacklisting, and whitelisting tends to be less complicated and more effective.
|
||||
|
||||
One whitelisting solution is the SafeHTML anti-XSS parser from PixelApes.
|
||||
|
||||
SafeHTML is smart enough to recognize valid HTML, so it can hunt and strip any dangerous tags. It does its parsing with another package called HTMLSax.
|
||||
|
||||
To install and use SafeHTML, do the following:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Go to [http://pixel-apes.com/safehtml/?page=safehtml][1] and download the latest version of SafeHTML.
|
||||
1. Put the files in the classes directory on your server. This directory contains everything that SafeHTML and HTMLSax need to function.
|
||||
1. Include the SafeHTML class file (safehtml.php) in your script.
|
||||
1. Create a new SafeHTML object called $safehtml.
|
||||
1. Sanitize your data with the $safehtml->parse() method.
|
||||
|
||||
Here's a complete example:
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
/* If you're storing the HTMLSax3.php in the /classes directory, along
|
||||
with the safehtml.php script, define XML_HTMLSAX3 as a null string. */
|
||||
define(XML_HTMLSAX3, '');
|
||||
// Include the class file.
|
||||
require_once('classes/safehtml.php');
|
||||
// Define some sample bad code.
|
||||
$data = "This data would raise an alert <script>alert('XSS Attack')</script>";
|
||||
// Create a safehtml object.
|
||||
$safehtml = new safehtml();
|
||||
// Parse and sanitize the data.
|
||||
$safe_data = $safehtml->parse($data);
|
||||
// Display result.
|
||||
echo 'The sanitized data is <br />' . $safe_data;
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to sanitize any other data in your script, you don't have to create a new object; just use the $safehtml->parse() method throughout your script.
|
||||
|
||||
#### What Can Go Wrong? ####
|
||||
|
||||
The biggest mistake you can make is assuming that this class completely shuts down XSS attacks. SafeHTML is a fairly complex script that checks for almost everything, but nothing is guaranteed. You still want to do the parameter validation that applies to your site. For example, this class doesn't check the length of a given variable to ensure that it fits into a database field. It doesn't check for buffer overflow problems.
|
||||
|
||||
XSS hackers are creative and use a variety of approaches to try to accomplish their objectives. Just look at RSnake's XSS tutorial at [http://ha.ckers.org/xss.html][2] to see how many ways there are to try to sneak code past someone's filters. The SafeHTML project has good programmers working overtime to try to stop XSS attacks, and it has a solid approach, but there's no guarantee that someone won't come up with some weird and fresh approach that could short-circuit its filters.
|
||||
|
||||
**Note: For an example of the powerful effects of XSS attacks, check out [http://namb.la/popular/tech.html][3], which shows a step-by-step approach to creating the JavaScript XSS worm that overloaded the MySpace servers. **
|
||||
|
||||
### Protecting Data with a One-Way Hash ###
|
||||
|
||||
This script performs a one-way transformation on data—in other words, it can make a hash signature of someone's password, but you can't ever decrypt it and go back to the original password. Why would you want to do that? The application is in storing passwords. An administrator doesn't need to know users' passwords—in fact, it's a good idea that only the user knows his or her password. The system (and the system alone) should be able to identify a correct password; this has been the Unix password security model for years. One-way password security works as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1. When a user or administrator creates or changes an account password, the system hashes the password and stores the result. The host system discards the plaintext password.
|
||||
1. When the user logs in to a system via any means, the entered password is again hashed.
|
||||
1. The host system throws away the plaintext password entered.
|
||||
1. This newly hashed password is compared against the stored hash.
|
||||
1. If the hashed passwords match, then the system grants access.
|
||||
|
||||
The host system does this without ever knowing the original password; in fact, the original value is completely irrelevant. As a side effect, should someone break into your system and steal your password database, the intruder will have a bunch of hashed passwords without any way of reversing them to find the originals. Of course, given enough time, computer power, and poorly chosen user passwords, an attacker could probably use a dictionary attack to figure out the passwords. Therefore, don't make it easy for people to get their hands on your password database, and if someone does, have everyone change their passwords.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Encryption Vs Hashing ####
|
||||
|
||||
Technically speaking, this process is not encryption. It is a hash, which is different from encryption for two reasons:
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike in encryption, data cannot be decrypted.
|
||||
|
||||
It's possible (but extremely unlikely) that two different strings will produce the same hash. There's no guarantee that a hash is unique, so don't try to use a hash as something like a unique key in a database.
|
||||
|
||||
function hash_ish($string) {
|
||||
return md5($string);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
The md5() function returns a 32-character hexadecimal string, based on the RSA Data Security Inc. Message-Digest Algorithm (also known, conveniently enough, as MD5). You can then insert that 32-character string into your database, compare it against other md5'd strings, or just adore its 32-character perfection.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Hacking the Script ####
|
||||
|
||||
It is virtually impossible to decrypt MD5 data. That is, it's very hard. However, you still need good passwords, because it's still easy to make a database of hashes for the entire dictionary. There are online MD5 dictionaries where you can enter **06d80eb0c50b49a509b49f2424e8c805** and get a result of "dog." Thus, even though MD5s can't technically be decrypted, they're still vulnerable—and if someone gets your password database, you can be sure that they'll be consulting an MD5 dictionary. Thus, it's in your best interests when creating password-based systems that the passwords are long (a minimum of six characters and preferably eight) and contain both letters and numbers. And make sure that the password isn't in the dictionary.
|
||||
|
||||
### Encrypting Data with Mcrypt ###
|
||||
|
||||
MD5 hashes work just fine if you never need to see your data in readable form. Unfortunately, that's not always an option—if you offer to store someone's credit card information in encrypted format, you need to decrypt it at some later point.
|
||||
|
||||
One of the easiest solutions is the Mcrypt module, an add-in for PHP that allows high-grade encryption. The Mcrypt library offers more than 30 ciphers to use in encryption and the possibility of a passphrase that ensures that only you (or, optionally, your users) can decrypt data.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's see some hands-on use. The following script contains functions that use Mcrypt to encrypt and decrypt data:
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$data = "Stuff you want encrypted";
|
||||
$key = "Secret passphrase used to encrypt your data";
|
||||
$cipher = "MCRYPT_SERPENT_256";
|
||||
$mode = "MCRYPT_MODE_CBC";
|
||||
function encrypt($data, $key, $cipher, $mode) {
|
||||
// Encrypt data
|
||||
return (string)
|
||||
base64_encode
|
||||
(
|
||||
mcrypt_encrypt
|
||||
(
|
||||
$cipher,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_key_size($cipher, $mode)),
|
||||
$data,
|
||||
$mode,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_block_size($cipher, $mode))
|
||||
)
|
||||
);
|
||||
}
|
||||
function decrypt($data, $key, $cipher, $mode) {
|
||||
// Decrypt data
|
||||
return (string)
|
||||
mcrypt_decrypt
|
||||
(
|
||||
$cipher,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_key_size($cipher, $mode)),
|
||||
base64_decode($data),
|
||||
$mode,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_block_size($cipher, $mode))
|
||||
);
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
The **mcrypt()** function requires several pieces of information:
|
||||
|
||||
- The data to encrypted.
|
||||
- The passphrase used to encrypt and unlock your data, also known as the key.
|
||||
- The cipher used to encrypt the data, which is the specific algorithm used to encrypt the data. This script uses **MCRYPT_SERPENT_256**, but you can choose from an array of fancy-sounding ciphers, including **MCRYPT_TWOFISH192**, **MCRYPT_RC2**, **MCRYPT_DES**, and **MCRYPT_LOKI97**.
|
||||
- The mode used to encrypt the data. There are several modes you can use, including Electronic Codebook and Cipher Feedback. This script uses **MCRYPT_MODE_CBC**, Cipher Block Chaining.
|
||||
- An **initialization vector**—also known as an IV, or a seed—an additional bit of binary data used to seed the encryption algorithm. That is, it's something extra thrown in to make the algorithm harder to crack.
|
||||
- The length of the string needed for the key and IV, which vary by cipher and block. Use the **mcrypt_get_key_size()** and **mcrypt_get_block_size()** functions to find the appropriate length; then trim the key value to the appropriate length with a handy **substr()** function. (If the key is shorter than the required value, don't worry—Mcrypt pads it with zeros.)
|
||||
|
||||
If someone steals both your data and your passphrase, they can just cycle through the ciphers until finding the one that works. Thus, we apply the additional security of using the **md5()** function on the key before we use it, so even having both data and passphrase won't get the intruder what she wants.
|
||||
|
||||
An intruder would need the function, the data, and the passphrase all at once—and if that is the case, they probably have complete access to your server, and you're hosed anyway.
|
||||
|
||||
There's a small data storage format problem here. Mcrypt returns its encrypted data in an ugly binary format that causes horrific errors when you try to store it in certain MySQL fields. Therefore, we use the **base64encode()** and **base64decode()** functions to transform the data into a SQL-compatible alphabetical format and retrieve rows.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Hacking the Script ####
|
||||
|
||||
In addition to experimenting with various encryption methods, you can add some convenience to this script. For example, rather than providing the key and mode every time, you could declare them as global constants in an included file.
|
||||
|
||||
### Generating Random Passwords ###
|
||||
|
||||
Random (but difficult-to-guess) strings are important in user security. For example, if someone loses a password and you're using MD5 hashes, you won't be able to, nor should you want to, look it up. Instead, you should generate a secure random password and send that to the user. Another application for random number generation is creating activation links in order to access your site's services. Here is a function that creates a password:
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
function make_password($num_chars) {
|
||||
if ((is_numeric($num_chars)) &&
|
||||
($num_chars > 0) &&
|
||||
(! is_null($num_chars))) {
|
||||
$password = '';
|
||||
$accepted_chars = 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890';
|
||||
// Seed the generator if necessary.
|
||||
srand(((int)((double)microtime()*1000003)) );
|
||||
for ($i=0; $i<=$num_chars; $i++) {
|
||||
$random_number = rand(0, (strlen($accepted_chars) -1));
|
||||
$password .= $accepted_chars[$random_number] ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return $password;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
#### Using the Script ####
|
||||
|
||||
The **make_password()** function returns a string, so all you need to do is supply the length of the string as an argument:
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$fifteen_character_password = make_password(15);
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
The function works as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
- The function makes sure that **$num_chars** is a positive nonzero integer.
|
||||
- The function initializes the **$password** variable to an empty string.
|
||||
- The function initializes the **$accepted_chars** variable to the list of characters the password may contain. This script uses all lowercase letters and the numbers 0 through 9, but you can choose any set of characters you like.
|
||||
- The random number generator needs a seed, so it gets a bunch of random-like values. (This isn't strictly necessary on PHP 4.2 and later.)
|
||||
- The function loops **$num_chars** times, one iteration for each character in the password to generate.
|
||||
- For each new character, the script looks at the length of **$accepted_chars**, chooses a number between 0 and the length, and adds the character at that index in **$accepted_chars** to $password.
|
||||
- After the loop completes, the function returns **$password**.
|
||||
|
||||
### License ###
|
||||
|
||||
This article, along with any associated source code and files, is licensed under [The Code Project Open License (CPOL)][4]
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.codeproject.com/Articles/363897/PHP-Security
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[SamarRizvi][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.codeproject.com/script/Membership/View.aspx?mid=7483622
|
||||
[1]:http://pixel-apes.com/safehtml/?page=safehtml
|
||||
[2]:http://ha.ckers.org/xss.html
|
||||
[3]:http://namb.la/popular/tech.html
|
||||
[4]:http://www.codeproject.com/info/cpol10.aspx
|
||||
@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
|
||||
FSSlc translating
|
||||
|
||||
Install Google Hangouts Desktop Client In Linux
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Earlier, we have seen how to [install Facebook Messenger in Linux][1] and [WhatsApp desktop client in Linux][2]. Both of these were unofficial apps. I have one more unofficial app for today and it is [Google Hangouts][3].
|
||||
|
||||
Of course, you can use Google Hangouts in the web browser but it is more fun to use the desktop client than the web browser one. Curious? Let’s see how to **install Google Hangouts desktop client in Linux** and how to use it.
|
||||
|
||||
### Install Google Hangouts in Linux ###
|
||||
|
||||
We are going to use an open source project called [yakyak][4] which is unofficial Google Hangouts client for Linux, Windows and OS X. I’ll show you how to use yakyak in Ubuntu but I believe that you can use the same method to use it in other Linux distributions. Before we see how to use it, let’s first take a look at main features of yakyak:
|
||||
|
||||
- Send and receive chat messages
|
||||
- Create and change conversations (rename, add people)
|
||||
- Leave and/or delete conversation
|
||||
- Desktop notifications
|
||||
- Toggle notifications on/off
|
||||
- Drag-drop, copy-paste or attach-button for image upload.
|
||||
- Hangupsbot sync room aware (actual user pics)
|
||||
- Shows inline images
|
||||
- History scrollback
|
||||
|
||||
Sounds good enough? Download the installation files from the link below:
|
||||
|
||||
- [Download Google Hangout client yakyak][5]
|
||||
|
||||
The downloaded file would be compressed. Extract it and you will see a directory like linux-x64 or linux-x32 based on your system. Go in to this directory and you should see a file named yakyak. Double click on it to run it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You’ll have to enter your Google Account credentials of course.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Once you are through, you’ll see a screen like the one below where you can chat with your Google contacts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to show profile pictures of the contacts, you can select View->Show conversation thumbnails.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You’ll also get desktop notification for new messages.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Worth a try? ###
|
||||
|
||||
I let you give it a try and decide whether or not it is worth to **install Google Hangouts client in Linux**. If you want official apps, take a look at these [instant messaging applications with native Linux clients][6]. Don’t forget to share your experience with Google Hangouts in Linux.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/install-google-hangouts-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://itsfoss.com/facebook-messenger-linux/
|
||||
[2]:http://itsfoss.com/whatsapp-linux-desktop/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.google.com/+/learnmore/hangouts/
|
||||
[4]:https://github.com/yakyak/yakyak
|
||||
[5]:https://github.com/yakyak/yakyak
|
||||
[6]:http://itsfoss.com/best-messaging-apps-linux/
|
||||
@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
|
||||
translating----geekpi
|
||||
|
||||
Linux FAQs with Answers--How to install a Brother printer on Linux
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
> **Question**: I have a Brother HL-2270DW laser printer, and want to print documents from my Linux box using this printer. How can I install an appropriate Brother printer driver on my Linux computer, and use it?
|
||||
|
||||
Brother is well known for its affordable [compact laser printer lineup][1]. You can get a high-quality WiFi/duplex-capable laser printer for less than 200USD, and the price keeps going down. On top of that, they provide reasonably good Linux support, so you can download and install their printer driver on your Linux computer. I bought [HL-2270DW][2] model more than a year ago, and I have been more than happy with its performance and reliability.
|
||||
|
||||
Here is how to install and configure a Brother printer driver on Linux. In this tutorial, I am demonstrating the installation of a USB driver for Brother HL-2270DW laser printer. So first connect your printer to a Linux computer via USB cable.
|
||||
|
||||
### Preparation ###
|
||||
|
||||
In this preparation step, go to the official [Brother support website][3], and search for the driver of your Brother printer by typing printer model name (e.g., HL-2270DW).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Once you go to the download page for your Brother printer, choose your Linux platform. For Debian, Ubuntu or their derivatives, choose "Linux (deb)". For Fedora, CentOS or RHEL, choose "Linux (rpm)".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On the next page, you will find a LPR driver as well as CUPS wrapper driver for your printer. The former is a command-line driver, while the latter allows you to configure and manage your printer via web-based administration interface. Especially the CUPS-based GUI is quite useful for (local or remote) printer maintenance. It is recommended that you install both drivers. So click on "Driver Install Tool" and download the installer file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Before proceeding to run the installer file, you need to do one additional step if you are using a 64-bit Linux system.
|
||||
|
||||
Since Brother printer drivers are developed for 32-bit Linux, you need to install necessary 32-bit libraries on 64-bit Linux as follows.
|
||||
|
||||
On older Debian (6.0 or earlier) or Ubuntu (11.04 or earlier), install the following package.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install ia32-libs
|
||||
|
||||
On newer Debian or Ubuntu which has introduced multiarch, you can install the following package instead:
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install lib32z1 lib32ncurses5
|
||||
|
||||
which replaces ia32-libs package. Or, you can install just:
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install lib32stdc++6
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using a Red Hat based Linux, you can install:
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo yum install glibc.i686
|
||||
|
||||
### Driver Installation ###
|
||||
|
||||
Now go ahead and extract a downloaded driver installer file.
|
||||
|
||||
$ gunzip linux-brprinter-installer-2.0.0-1.gz
|
||||
|
||||
Next, run the driver installer file as follows.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo sh ./linux-brprinter-installer-2.0.0-1
|
||||
|
||||
You will be prompted to type a printer model name. Type the model name of your printer, for example "HL-2270DW".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
After agreeing to GPL license agreement, accept default answers to any subsequent questions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now LPR/CUPS printer drivers are installed. Proceed to configure your printer next.
|
||||
|
||||
### Printer Configuration ###
|
||||
|
||||
We are going to configure and manage a Brother via CUPS-based web management interface.
|
||||
|
||||
First, verify that CUPS daemon is running successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo netstat -nap | grep 631
|
||||
|
||||
Open a web browser window, and go to http://localhost:631. You will see the following CUPS printer management interface.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Go to "Administration" tab, and click on "Manage Printers" under Printers section.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You must see your printer (HL-2270DW) listed in the next page. Click on the printer name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In the dropdown menu titled "Administration", choose "Set As Server Default" option. This will make your printer system-wide default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When asked to authenticate yourself, type in your Linux login information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now the basic configuration step is mostly done. To test print, open any document viewer application (e.g., PDF viwer), and print it. You will see "HL-2270DW" listed and chosen by default in printer setting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Print should work now. You can see the printer status and manage printer jobs via the same CUPS web interface.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://ask.xmodulo.com/install-brother-printer-linux.html
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Dan Nanni][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://ask.xmodulo.com/author/nanni
|
||||
[1]:http://xmodulo.com/go/brother_printers
|
||||
[2]:http://xmodulo.com/go/hl_2270dw
|
||||
[3]:http://support.brother.com/
|
||||
@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
|
||||
wyangsun 翻译中
|
||||
Why is the ibdata1 file continuously growing in MySQL?
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
We receive this question about the ibdata1 file in MySQL very often in [Percona Support][1].
|
||||
|
||||
The panic starts when the monitoring server sends an alert about the storage of the MySQL server – saying that the disk is about to get filled.
|
||||
|
||||
After some research you realize that most of the disk space is used by the InnoDB’s shared tablespace ibdata1. You have [innodb_file_per_table][2] enabled, so the question is:
|
||||
|
||||
### What is stored in ibdata1? ###
|
||||
|
||||
When you have innodb_file_per_table enabled, the tables are stored in their own tablespace but the shared tablespace is still used to store other InnoDB’s internal data:
|
||||
|
||||
- data dictionary aka metadata of InnoDB tables
|
||||
- change buffer
|
||||
- doublewrite buffer
|
||||
- undo logs
|
||||
|
||||
Some of them can be configured on [Percona Server][3] to avoid becoming too large. For example you can set a maximum size for change buffer with [innodb_ibuf_max_size][4] or store the doublewrite buffer on a separate file with [innodb_doublewrite_file][5].
|
||||
|
||||
In MySQL 5.6 you can also create external UNDO tablespaces so they will be in their own files instead of stored inside ibdata1. Check following [documentation link][6].
|
||||
|
||||
### What is causing the ibdata1 to grow that fast? ###
|
||||
|
||||
Usually the first command that we need to run when there is a MySQL problem is:
|
||||
|
||||
SHOW ENGINE INNODB STATUSG
|
||||
|
||||
That will show us very valuable information. We start checking the **TRANSACTIONS** section and we find this:
|
||||
|
||||
---TRANSACTION 36E, ACTIVE 1256288 sec
|
||||
MySQL thread id 42, OS thread handle 0x7f8baaccc700, query id 7900290 localhost root
|
||||
show engine innodb status
|
||||
Trx read view will not see trx with id >= 36F, sees < 36F
|
||||
|
||||
This is the most common reason, a pretty old transaction created 14 days ago. The status is **ACTIVE**, that means InnoDB has created a snapshot of the data so it needs to maintain old pages in **undo** to be able to provide a consistent view of the database since that transaction was started. If your database is heavily write loaded that means lots of undo pages are being stored.
|
||||
|
||||
If you don’t find any long-running transaction you can also monitor another variable from the INNODB STATUS, the “**History list length.**” It shows the number of pending purge operations. In this case the problem is usually caused because the purge thread (or master thread in older versions) is not capable to process undo records with the same speed as they come in.
|
||||
|
||||
### How can I check what is being stored in the ibdata1? ###
|
||||
|
||||
Unfortunately MySQL doesn’t provide information of what is being stored on that ibdata1 shared tablespace but there are two tools that will be very helpful. First a modified version of innochecksum made by Mark Callaghan and published in [this bug report][7].
|
||||
|
||||
It is pretty easy to use:
|
||||
|
||||
# ./innochecksum /var/lib/mysql/ibdata1
|
||||
0 bad checksum
|
||||
13 FIL_PAGE_INDEX
|
||||
19272 FIL_PAGE_UNDO_LOG
|
||||
230 FIL_PAGE_INODE
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_IBUF_FREE_LIST
|
||||
892 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_ALLOCATED
|
||||
2 FIL_PAGE_IBUF_BITMAP
|
||||
195 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_SYS
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_TRX_SYS
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_FSP_HDR
|
||||
1 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_XDES
|
||||
0 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_BLOB
|
||||
0 FIL_PAGE_TYPE_ZBLOB
|
||||
0 other
|
||||
3 max index_id
|
||||
|
||||
It has 19272 UNDO_LOG pages from a total of 20608. **That’s the 93% of the tablespace**.
|
||||
|
||||
The second way to check the content of a tablespace are the [InnoDB Ruby Tools][8] made by Jeremy Cole. It is a more advanced tool to examine the internals of InnoDB. For example we can use the space-summary parameter to get a list with every page and its data type. We can use standard Unix tools to get the number of **UNDO_LOG** pages:
|
||||
|
||||
# innodb_space -f /var/lib/mysql/ibdata1 space-summary | grep UNDO_LOG | wc -l
|
||||
19272
|
||||
|
||||
Altough in this particular case innochecksum is faster and easier to use I recommend you to play with Jeremy’s tools to learn more about the data distribution inside InnoDB and its internals.
|
||||
|
||||
OK, now we know where the problem is. The next question:
|
||||
|
||||
### How can I solve the problem? ###
|
||||
|
||||
The answer to this question is easy. If you can still commit that query, do it. If not you’ll have to kill the thread to start the rollback process. That will just stop ibdata1 from growing but it is clear that your software has a bug or someone made a mistake. Now that you know how to identify where is the problem you need to find who or what is causing it using your own debugging tools or the general query log.
|
||||
|
||||
If the problem is caused by the purge thread then the solution is usually to upgrade to a newer version where you can use a dedicated purge thread instead of the master thread. More information on the following [documentation link][9].
|
||||
|
||||
### Is there any way to recover the used space? ###
|
||||
|
||||
No, it is not possible at least in an easy and fast way. InnoDB tablespaces never shrink… see the following [10-year old bug report][10] recently updated by James Day (thanks):
|
||||
|
||||
When you delete some rows, the pages are marked as deleted to reuse later but the space is never recovered. The only way is to start the database with fresh ibdata1. To do that you would need to take a full logical backup with mysqldump. Then stop MySQL and remove all the databases, ib_logfile* and ibdata* files. When you start MySQL again it will create a new fresh shared tablespace. Then, recover the logical dump.
|
||||
|
||||
### Summary ###
|
||||
|
||||
When the ibdata1 file is growing too fast within MySQL it is usually caused by a long running transaction that we have forgotten about. Try to solve the problem as fast as possible (commiting or killing a transaction) because you won’t be able to recover the wasted disk space without the painfully slow mysqldump process.
|
||||
|
||||
Monitoring the database to avoid these kind of problems is also very recommended. Our [MySQL Monitoring Plugins][11] includes a Nagios script that can alert you if it finds a too old running transaction.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: https://www.percona.com/blog/2013/08/20/why-is-the-ibdata1-file-continuously-growing-in-mysql/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Miguel Angel Nieto][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:https://www.percona.com/blog/author/miguelangelnieto/
|
||||
[1]:https://www.percona.com/products/mysql-support
|
||||
[2]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.5/en/innodb-parameters.html#sysvar_innodb_file_per_table
|
||||
[3]:https://www.percona.com/software/percona-server
|
||||
[4]:https://www.percona.com/doc/percona-server/5.5/scalability/innodb_insert_buffer.html#innodb_ibuf_max_size
|
||||
[5]:https://www.percona.com/doc/percona-server/5.5/performance/innodb_doublewrite_path.html?id=percona-server:features:percona_innodb_doublewrite_path#innodb_doublewrite_file
|
||||
[6]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.6/en/innodb-performance.html#innodb-undo-tablespace
|
||||
[7]:http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=57611
|
||||
[8]:https://github.com/jeremycole/innodb_ruby
|
||||
[9]:http://dev.mysql.com/doc/innodb/1.1/en/innodb-improved-purge-scheduling.html
|
||||
[10]:http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=1341
|
||||
[11]:https://www.percona.com/software/percona-monitoring-plugins
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
|
||||
A Week With GNOME As My Linux Desktop: What They Get Right & Wrong - Page 1 - Introduction
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
*Author's Note: If by some miracle you managed to click this article without reading the title then I want to re-iterate something... This is an editorial. These are my opinions. They are not representative of Phoronix, or Michael, these are my own thoughts.*
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, yes... This is quite possibly a flame-bait article. I hope the community is better than that, because I do want to start a discussion and give feedback to both the KDE and Gnome communities. For that reason when I point out, what I see as, a flaw I will try to be specific and direct so that any discussion can be equally specific and direct. For the record: The alternative title for this article was "Death By A Thousand [Paper Cuts][1]".
|
||||
|
||||
Now, with that out of the way... Onto the article.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When I sent the [Fedora 22 KDE Review][2] off to Michael I did it with a bit of a bad taste in my mouth. It wasn't because I didn't like KDE, or hadn't been enjoying Fedora, far from it. In fact, I started to transition my T450s over to Arch Linux but quickly decided against that, as I enjoyed the level of convenience that Fedora brings to me for many things.
|
||||
|
||||
The reason I had a bad taste in my mouth was because the Fedora developers put a lot of time and effort into their "Workstation" product and I wasn't seeing any of it. I wasn't using Fedora the way the main developers had intended it to be used and therefore wasn't getting the "Fedora Experience." It felt like someone reviewing Ubuntu by using Kubuntu, using a Hackintosh to review OS X, or reviewing Gentoo by using Sabayon. A lot of readers in the forums bash on Michael for reviewing distributions in their default configurations-- myself included. While I still do believe that reviews should be done under 'real-world' configurations, I do see the value in reviewing something in the condition it was given to you-- for better or worse.
|
||||
|
||||
It was with that attitude in mind that I decided to take a dip in the Gnome pool.
|
||||
|
||||
I do, however, need to add one more disclaimer... I am looking at KDE and Gnome as they are packaged in Fedora. OpenSUSE, Kubuntu, Arch, etc, might all have different implementations of each desktop that will change whether my specific 'pain points' are relevant to your distribution. Furthermore, despite the title, this is going to be a VERY KDE heavy article. I called the article what I did because it was actually USING Gnome that made me realize how many "paper cuts" KDE actually has.
|
||||
|
||||
### Login Screen ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
I normally don't mind Distributions shipping distro-specific themes, because most of them make the desktop look nicer. I finally found my exception.
|
||||
|
||||
First impression's count for a lot, right? Well, GDM definitely gets this one right. The login screen is incredibly clean with consistent design language through every single part of it. The use of common-language icons instead of text boxes helps in that regard.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
That is not to say that the Fedora 22 KDE login screen-- now SDDM rather than KDM-- looks 'bad' per say but its definitely more jarring.
|
||||
|
||||
Where's the fault? The top bar. Look at the Gnome screenshot-- you select a user and you get a tiny little gear simple for selecting what session you want to log into. The design is clean, it gets out of your way, you could honestly miss it completely if you weren't paying attention. Now look at the blue KDE screenshot, the bar doesn't look it was even rendered using the same widgets, and its entire placement feels like an after thought of "Well shit, we need to throw this option somewhere..."
|
||||
|
||||
The same can be said for the Reboot and Shutdown options in the top right. Why not just a power button that creates a drop down menu that has a drop down for Reboot, Shutdown, Suspend? Having the buttons be different colors than the background certainly makes them stick out and be noticeable... but I don't think in a good way. Again, they feel like an after thought.
|
||||
|
||||
GDM is also far more useful from a practical standpoint, look again along the top row. The time is listed, there's a volume control so that if you are trying to be quiet you can mute all sounds before you even login, there's an accessibility button for things like high contrast, zooming, test to speech, etc, all available via simple toggle buttons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Swap it to upstream's Breeze theme and... suddenly most of my complaints are fixed. Common-language icons, everything is in the center of the screen, but the less important stuff is off to the sides. This creates a nice harmony between the top and bottom of the screen since they are equally empty. You still have a text box for the session switcher, but I can forgive that since the power buttons are now common language icons. Current time is available which is a nice touch, as is a battery life indicator. Sure gnome still has a few nice additions, such as the volume applet and the accessibility buttons, but Breeze is a step up from Fedora's KDE theme.
|
||||
|
||||
Go to Windows (pre-Windows 8 & 10...) or OS X and you will see similar things – very clean, get-out-of-your-way lock screens and login screens that are devoid of text boxes or other widgets that distract the eye. It's a design that works and that is non-distracting. Fedora... Ship Breeze by default. VDG got the design of the Breeze theme right. Don't mess it up.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=gnome-week-editorial&num=1
|
||||
|
||||
作者：Eric Griffith
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:https://wiki.ubuntu.com/One%20Hundred%20Papercuts
|
||||
[2]:http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=fedora-22-kde&num=1
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
|
||||
A Week With GNOME As My Linux Desktop: What They Get Right & Wrong - Page 2 - The GNOME Desktop
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
### The Desktop ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
I spent the first five days of my week logging into Gnome manually-- not turning on automatic login. On night of the fifth day I got annoyed with having to login by hand and so I went into the User Manager and turned on automatic login. The next time I logged in I got a prompt: "Your keychain was not unlocked. Please enter your password to unlock your keychain." That was when I realized something... Gnome had been automatically unlocking my keychain—my wallet in KDE speak-- every time I logged in via GDM. It was only when I bypassed GDM's login that Gnome had to step in and make me do it manually.
|
||||
|
||||
Now, I am under the personal belief that if you enable automatic login then your key chain should be unlocked automatically as well-- otherwise what's the point? Either way you still have to type in your password and at least if you hit the GDM Login screen you have a chance to change your session if you want to.
|
||||
|
||||
But, regardless of that, it was at that moment that I realized it was such a simple thing that made the desktop feel so much more like it was working WITH ME. When I log into KDE via SDDM? Before the splash screen is even finished loading there is a window popping up over top the splash animation-- thereby disrupting the splash screen-- prompting me to unlock my KDE wallet or GPG keyring.
|
||||
|
||||
If a wallet doesn't exist already you get prompted to create a wallet-- why couldn't one have been created for me at user creation?-- and then get asked to pick between two encryption methods, where one is even implied as insecure (Blowfish), why are you letting me pick something that's insecure for my security? Author's Note: If you install the actual KDE spin and don't just install KDE after-the-fact then a wallet is created for you at user creation. Unfortunately it's not unlocked for you automatically, and it seems to use the older Blowfish method rather than the new, and more secure, GPG method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you DO pick the secure one (GPG) then it tries to load an Gpg key... which I hope you had one created already because if you don't you get yelled at. How do you create one? Well, it doesn't offer to make one for you... nor It doesn't tell you... and if you do manage TO figure out that you are supposed to use KGpg to create the key then you get taken through several menus and prompts that are nothing but confusing to new users. Why are you asking me where the GPG binary is located? How on earth am I supposed to know? Can't you just use the most recent one if there's more than one? And if there IS only one then, I ask again, why are you prompting me?
|
||||
|
||||
Why are you asking me what key size and encryption algorithm to use? You select 2048 and RSA/RSA by default, so why not just use those? If you want to have those options available then throw them under the "Expert mode" button that is right there. This isn't just about having configuration options available, its about needless things that get thrown in the user's face by default. This is going to be a theme for the rest of the article... KDE needs better sane defaults. Configuration is great, I love the configuration I get with KDE, but it needs to learn when to and when not to prompt. It also needs to learn that "Well its configurable" is no excuse for bad defaults. Defaults are what users see initially, bad defaults will lose users.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's move on from the key chain issue though, because I think I made my point.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=gnome-week-editorial&num=2
|
||||
|
||||
作者：Eric Griffith
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
|
||||
A Week With GNOME As My Linux Desktop: What They Get Right & Wrong - Page 3 - GNOME Applications
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
### Applications ###
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This is the one area where things are basically a wash. Each environment has a few applications that are really nice, and a few that are not so great. Once again though, Gnome gets the little things right in a way that KDE completely misses. None of KDE's applications are bad or broken, that's not what I'm saying. They function. But that's about it. To use an analogy: they passed the test, but they sure didn't get any where close to 100% on it.
|
||||
|
||||
Gnome on left, KDE on right. Dragon performs perfectly fine, it has clearly marked buttons for playing a file, URL, or a disc, just as you can do under Gnome Videos... but Gnome takes it one extra little step further in the name of convenience and user friendliness: they show all the videos detected under your system by default, without you having to do anything. KDE has Baloo-- just as they had Nepomuk before that-- why not use them? They've got a list video files that are freely accessible... but don't make use of the feature.
|
||||
|
||||
Moving on... Music Players.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Both of these applications, Rhythmbox on the left and Amarok on the right were opened up and then a screenshot was immediately taken, nothing was clicked, or altered. See the difference? Rhythmbox looks like a music player. It's direct, there's obvious ways to sort the results, it knows what is trying to be and what it's job is: to play music.
|
||||
|
||||
Amarok feels like one of the tech demos, or library demos where someone puts every option and extension they possible can all inside one application in order to show them off-- it's never something that gets shipped as production, it's just there to show off bits and pieces. And that's exactly what Amarok feels like: its someone trying to show off every single possible cool thing they shove into a media player without ever stopping to think "Wait, what were trying to write again? An app to play music?"
|
||||
|
||||
Just look at the default layout. What is front and center for the user? A visualizer and Wikipedia integration-- the largest and most prominent column on the page. What's the second largest? Playlist list. Third largest, aka smallest? The actual music listing. How on earth are these sane defaults for a core application?
|
||||
|
||||
Software Managers! Something that has seen a lot of push in recent years and will likely only see a bigger push in the months to come. Unfortunately, it's another area where KDE was so close... and then fell on its face right at the finish line.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Gnome Software is probably my new favorite software center, minus one gripe which I will get to in a bit. Muon, I wanted to like you. I really did. But you are a design nightmare. When the VDG was drawing up plans for you (mockup below), you looked pretty slick. Good use of white space, clean design, nice category listing, your whole not-being-split-into-two-applications.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Then someone got around to coding you and doing your actual UI, and I can only guess they were drunk while they did it.
|
||||
|
||||
Let's look at Gnome Software. What's smack dab in the middle? The application, its screenshots, its description, etc. What's smack dab in the middle of Muon? Gigantic waste of white space. Gnome Software also includes the lovely convenience feature of putting a "Launch" button right there in case you already have an application installed. Convenience and ease of use are important, people. Honestly, JUST having things in Muon be centered aligned would probably make things look better already.
|
||||
|
||||
What's along the top edge of Gnome Software, like a tab listing? All Software, Installed, Updates. Clean language, direct, to the point. Muon? Well, we have "Discover", which works okay as far as language goes, and then we have Installed, and then nothing. Where's updates?
|
||||
|
||||
Well.. the developers decided to split updates off into its own application, thus requiring you to open two applications to handle your software-- one to install it, and one to update it-- going against every Software Center paradigm that has ever existed since the Synaptic graphical package manager.
|
||||
|
||||
I'm not going to show it in a screenshot just because I don't want to have to clean up my system afterwards, but if you go into Muon and start installing something the way it shows that is by adding a little tab to the bottom of your screen with the application's name. That tab doesn't go away when the application is done installing either, so if you're installing a lot of applications at a single time then you'll just slowly accumulate tabs along the bottom that you then have to go through and clean up manually, because if you don't then they grow off the screen and you have to swipe through them all to get to the most recent ones. Think: opening 50 tabs in Firefox. Major annoyance, major inconvenience.
|
||||
|
||||
I did say I would bash on Gnome a bit, and I meant it. Muon does get one thing very right that Gnome Software doesn't. Under the settings bar Muon has an option for "Show Technical Packages" aka: compilers, software libraries, non-graphical applications, applications without AppData, etc. Gnome doesn't. If you want to install any of those you have to drop down to the terminal. I think that's wrong. I certainly understand wanting to push AppData but I think they pushed it too soon. What made me realize Gnome didn't have this setting was when I went to install PowerTop and couldn't get Gnome to display it-- no AppData, no "Show Technical Packages" setting.
|
||||
|
||||
Doubly unfortunate is the fact that you can't "just use apper" if you're under KDE since...
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Apper's support for installing local packages has been broken for since Fedora 19 or so, almost two years. I love the attention to detail and quality.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=gnome-week-editorial&num=3
|
||||
|
||||
作者：Eric Griffith
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
|
||||
A Week With GNOME As My Linux Desktop: What They Get Right & Wrong - Page 4 - GNOME Settings
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
### Settings ###
|
||||
|
||||
There are a few specific KDE Control modules that I am going to pick at, mostly because they are so laughable horrible compared to their gnome counter-part that its honestly pathetic.
|
||||
|
||||
First one up? Printers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Gnome is on the left, KDE is on the right. You know what the difference is between the printer applet on the left, and the one on the right? When I opened up Gnome Control Center and hit "Printers" the applet popped up and nothing happened. When I opened up KDE System Settings and hit "Printers" I got a password prompt. Before I was even allowed to LOOK at the printers I had to give up ROOT'S password.
|
||||
|
||||
Let me just re-iterate that. In this, the days of PolicyKit and Logind, I am still being asked for Root's password for what should be a sudo operation. I didn't even SETUP root's password when I installed the system. I had to drop down to Konsole and run 'sudo passwd root' so that I could GIVE root a password so that I could go back into System Setting's printer applet and then give up root's password to even LOOK at what printers were available. Once I did that I got prompted for root's password AGAIN when I hit "Add Printer" then I got prompted for root's password AGAIN after I went through and selected a printer and driver. Three times I got asked for ROOT'S password just to add a printer to the system.
|
||||
|
||||
When I added a printer under Gnome I didn't get prompted for my SUDO password until I hit "Unlock" in the printer applet. I got asked once, then I never got asked again. KDE, I am begging you... Adopt Gnome's "Unlock" methodology. Do not prompt for a password until you really need one. Furthermore, whatever library is out there that allows for KDE applications to bypass PolicyKit / Logind (if its available) and prompt directly for root... Bin that code. If this was a multi-user system I either have to give up root's password, or be there every second of every day in order to put it in any time a user might have to update, change, or add a new printer. Both options are completely unacceptable.
|
||||
|
||||
One more thing...
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Question to the forums: What looks cleaner to you? I had this realization when I was writing this article: Gnome's applet makes it very clear where any additional printers are going to go, they set aside a column on the left to list them. Before I added a second printer to KDE, and it suddenly grew a left side column, I had this nightmare-image in my head of the applet just shoving another icon into the screen and them being listed out like preview images in a folder of pictures. I was pleasantly surprised to see that I was wrong but the fact that the applet just 'grew' another column that didn't exist before and drastically altered its presentation is not really 'good' either. It's a design that's confusing, shocking, and non-intuitive.
|
||||
|
||||
Enough about printers though... Next KDE System Setting that is up for my public stoning? Multimedia, Aka Phonon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
As always, Gnome's on the left, KDE is on the right. Let's just run through the Gnome setting first... The eyes go left to right, top to bottom, right? So let's do the same. First up: volume control slider. The blue hint against the empty bar with 100% clearly marked removes all confusion about which way is "volume up." Immediately after the slider is an easy On/Off toggle that functions a mute on/off. Points to Gnome for remembering what the volume was set to BEFORE I muted sound, and returning to that same level AFTER I press volume-up to un-mute. Kmixer, you amnesiac piece of crap, I wish I could say as much about you.
|
||||
|
||||
Moving on! Tabbed options for Output, Input and Applications? With per application volume controls within easy reach? Gnome I love you more and more with every passing second. Balance options, sound profiles, and a clearly marked "Test Speakers" option.
|
||||
|
||||
I'm not sure how this could have been implemented in a cleaner, more concise way. Yes, it's just a Gnome-ized Pavucontrol but I think that's the point. Pavucontrol got it mostly right to begin with, the Sound applet in Gnome Control Center just refines it slightly to make it even closer to perfect.
|
||||
|
||||
Phonon, you're up. And let me start by saying: What the fsck am I looking at? -I- get that I am looking at the priority list for the audio devices on the system, but the way it is presented is a bit of a nightmare. Also where are the things the user probably cares about? A priority list is a great thing to have, it SHOULD be available, but it's something the user messes with once or twice and then never touches again. It's not important, or common, enough to warrant being front and center. Where's the volume slider? Where's per application controls? The things that users will be using more frequently? Well.. those are under Kmix, a separate program, with its own settings and configuration... not under the System Settings... which kind of makes System Settings a bit of a misnomer. And in that same vein, Let's hop over to network settings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Presented above is the Gnome Network Settings. KDE's isn't included because of the reason I'm about to hit on. If you go to KDE's System Settings and hit any of the three options under the "Network" Section you get tons of options: Bluetooth settings, default username and password for Samba shares (Seriously, "Connectivity" only has 2 options: Username and password for SMB shares. How the fsck does THAT deserve the all-inclusive title "Connectivity"?), controls for Browser Identification (which only work for Konqueror...a dead project), proxy settings, etc... Where's my wifi settings? They aren't there. Where are they? Well, they are in the network applet's private settings... not under Network Settings...
|
||||
|
||||
KDE, you're killing me. You have "System Settings" USE IT!
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=gnome-week-editorial&num=4
|
||||
|
||||
作者：Eric Griffith
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
|
||||
A Week With GNOME As My Linux Desktop: What They Get Right & Wrong - Page 5 - Conclusion
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
### User Experience and Closing Thoughts ###
|
||||
|
||||
When Gnome 2.x and KDE 4.x were going head to head.. I jumped between the two quite happily. Some things I loved, some things I hated, but over all they were both a pleasure to use. Then Gnome 3.x came around and all of the drama with Gnome Shell. I swore off Gnome and avoided it every chance I could. It wasn't user friendly, it was non-intuitive, it broke an establish paradigm in preparation for tablet's taking over the world... A future that, judging from the dropping sales of tablets, will never come.
|
||||
|
||||
Eight releases of Gnome 3 later and the unimaginable happened. Gnome got user friendly. Gnome got intuitive. Is it perfect? Of course not. I still hate the paradigm it tries to push, I hate how it tries to force a work flow onto me, but both of those things can be gotten used to with time and patience. Once you have managed to look past Gnome Shell's alien appearance and you start interacting with it and the other parts of Gnome (Control Center especially) you see what Gnome has definitely gotten right: the little things. The attention to detail.
|
||||
|
||||
People can adapt to new paradigms, people can adapt to new work flows-- the iPhone and iPad proved that-- but what will always bother them are the paper cuts.
|
||||
|
||||
Which brings up an important distinction between KDE and Gnome. Gnome feels like a product. It feels like a singular experience. When you use it, it feels like it is complete and that everything you need is at your fingertips. It feel's like THE Linux desktop in the same way that Windows or OS X have THE desktop experience: what you need is there and it was all written by the same guys working on the same team towards the same goal. Hell, even an application prompting for sudo access feels like an intentional part of the desktop under Gnome, much the way that it is under Windows. In KDE it's just some random-looking window popup that any application could have created. It doesn't feel like a part of the system stopping and going "Hey! Something has requested administrative rights! Do you want to let it go through?" in an official capacity.
|
||||
|
||||
KDE doesn't feel like cohesive experience. KDE doesn't feel like it has a direction its moving in, it doesn't feel like a full experience. KDE feels like its a bunch of pieces that are moving in a bunch of different directions, that just happen to have a shared toolkit beneath them. If that's what the developers are happy with, then fine, good for them, but if the developers still have the hope of offering the best experience possible then the little stuff needs to matter. The user experience and being intuitive needs to be at the forefront of every single application, there needs to be a vision of what KDE wants to offer -and- how it should look.
|
||||
|
||||
Is there anything stopping me from using Gnome Disks under KDE? Rhythmbox? Evolution? Nope. Nope. Nope. But that misses the point. Gnome and KDE both market themselves as "Desktop Environments." They are supposed to be full -environments-, that means they all the pieces come and fit together, that you use that environment's tools because they are saying "We support everything you need to have a full desktop." Honestly? Only Gnome seems to fit the bill of being complete. KDE feel's half-finished when it comes to "coming together" part, let alone offering everything you need for a "full experience". There's no counterpart to Gnome Disks-- kpartitionmanager prompts for root. No "First Time User" run through, it just now got a user manager in Kubuntu. Hell, Gnome even provides a Maps, Notes, Calendar and Clock application. Do all of these applications matter 100%? No, of course not. But the fact that Gnome has them helps to push the idea that Gnome is a full and complete experience.
|
||||
|
||||
My complaints about KDE are not impossible to fix, not by a long shot. But it requires people to care. It requires developers to take pride in their work beyond just function-- form counts for a whole hell of a lot. Don't take away the user's ability to configure things-- the lack of configuration is one of my biggest gripes with GNOME 3.x, but don't use "Well you can configure it however you want," as an excuse for not providing sane defaults. The defaults are what users are going to see, they are what the users are going to judge from the first moment they open your application. Make it a good impression.
|
||||
|
||||
I know the KDE developers know design matters, that is WHY the Visual Design Group exists, but it feels like they aren't using the VDG to their fullest. And therein lies KDE's hamartia. It's not that KDE can't be complete, it's not that it can't come together and fix the downfalls, it just that they haven't. They aimed for the bulls eye... but they missed.
|
||||
|
||||
And before anyone says it... Don't say "Patches are welcome." Because while I can happily submit patches for the individual annoyances more will just keep coming as developers keep on their marry way of doing things in non-intuitive ways. This isn't about Muon not being center-aligned. This isn't about Amarok having an ugly UI. This isn't about the volume and brightness pop-up notifiers taking up a large chunk of my screen real-estate every time I hit my hotkeys (seriously, someone shrink those things).
|
||||
|
||||
This is about a mentality of apathy, this is about developers apparently not thinking things through when they make the UI for their applications. Everything the KDE Community does works fine. Amarok plays music. Dragon Player plays videos. Kwin / Qt & kdelibs is seemingly more power efficient than Mutter / gtk (according to my battery life times. Non-scientific testing). Those things are all well and good, and important.. but the presentation matters to. Arguably, the presentation matters the most because that is what user's see and interact with.
|
||||
|
||||
To KDE application developers... Get the VDG involved. Make every single 'core' application get its design vetted and approved by the VDG, have a UI/UX expert from the VDG go through the usage patterns and usage flow of your application to make sure its intuitive. Hell, even just posting a mock up to the VDG forums and asking for feedback would probably get you some nice pointers and feedback for whatever application you're working on. You have this great resource there, now actually use them.
|
||||
|
||||
I am not trying to sound ungrateful. I love KDE, I love the work and effort that volunteers put into giving Linux users a viable desktop, and an alternative to Gnome. And it is because I care that I write this article. Because I want to see KDE excel, I want to see it go further and farther than it has before. But doing that requires work on everyone's part, and it requires that people don't hold back criticism. It requires that people are honest about their interaction with the system and where it falls apart. If we can't give direct criticism, if we can't say "This sucks!" then it will never get better.
|
||||
|
||||
Will I still use Gnome after this week? Probably not, no. Gnome still trying to force a work flow on me that I don't want to follow or abide by, I feel less productive when I'm using it because it doesn't follow my paradigm. For my friends though, when they ask me "What desktop environment should I use?" I'm probably going to recommend Gnome, especially if they are less technical users who want things to "just work." And that is probably the most damning assessment I could make in regards to the current state of KDE.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.phoronix.com/scan.php?page=article&item=gnome-week-editorial&num=5
|
||||
|
||||
作者：Eric Griffith
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
|
||||
How to Configure Chef (server/client) on Ubuntu 14.04 / 15.04
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
Chef is a configuration management and automation tool for information technology professionals that configures and manages your infrastructure whether it is on-premises or in the cloud. It can be used to speed up application deployment and to coordinate the work of multiple system administrators and developers involving hundreds, or even thousands, of servers and applications to support a large customer base. The key to Chef’s power is that it turns infrastructure into code. Once you master Chef, you will be able to enable web IT with first class support for managing your cloud infrastructure with an easy automation of your internal deployments or end users systems.
|
||||
|
||||
Here are the major components of Chef that we are going to setup and configure in this tutorial.
|
||||
chef components
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Chef Prerequisites and Versions ###
|
||||
|
||||
We are going to setup Chef configuration management system under the following basic environment.
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table width="701" style="height: 284px;">
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="660" colspan="2"><strong>Chef, Configuration Management Tool</strong></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="220"><strong>Base Operating System</strong></td>
|
||||
<td width="492">Ubuntu 14.04.1 LTS (x86_64)</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="220"><strong>Chef Server</strong></td>
|
||||
<td width="492">Version 12.1.0</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="220"><strong>Chef Manage</strong></td>
|
||||
<td width="492">Version 1.17.0</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="220"><strong>Chef Development Kit</strong></td>
|
||||
<td width="492">Version 0.6.2</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="220"><strong>RAM and CPU</strong></td>
|
||||
<td width="492">4 GB , 2.0+2.0 GHZ</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
### Chef Server's Installation and Configurations ###
|
||||
|
||||
Chef Server is central core component that stores recipes as well as other configuration data and interact with the workstations and nodes. let's download the installation media by selecting the latest version of chef server from its official web link.
|
||||
|
||||
We will get its installation package and install it by using following commands.
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Downloading Chef Server**
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:/tmp# wget https://web-dl.packagecloud.io/chef/stable/packages/ubuntu/trusty/chef-server-core_12.1.0-1_amd64.deb
|
||||
|
||||
**2) To install Chef Server**
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:/tmp# dpkg -i chef-server-core_12.1.0-1_amd64.deb
|
||||
|
||||
**3) Reconfigure Chef Server**
|
||||
|
||||
Now Run the following command to start all of the chef server services ,this step may take a few minutes to complete as its composed of many different services that work together to create a functioning system.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:/tmp# chef-server-ctl reconfigure
|
||||
|
||||
The chef server startup command 'chef-server-ctl reconfigure' needs to be run twice so that installation ends with the following completion output.
|
||||
|
||||
Chef Client finished, 342/350 resources updated in 113.71139964 seconds
|
||||
opscode Reconfigured!
|
||||
|
||||
**4) Reboot OS**
|
||||
|
||||
Once the installation complete reboot the operating system for the best working without doing this we you might get the following SSL_connect error during creation of User.
|
||||
|
||||
ERROR: Errno::ECONNRESET: Connection reset by peer - SSL_connect
|
||||
|
||||
**5) Create new Admin User**
|
||||
|
||||
Run the following command to create a new administrator user with its profile settings. During its creation user’s RSA private key is generated automatically that should be saved to a safe location. The --filename option will save the RSA private key to a specified path.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:/tmp# chef-server-ctl user-create kashi kashi kashi kashif.fareedi@gmail.com kashi123 --filename /root/kashi.pem
|
||||
|
||||
### Chef Manage Setup on Chef Server ###
|
||||
|
||||
Chef Manage is a management console for Enterprise Chef that enables a web-based user interface for visualizing and managing nodes, data bags, roles, environments, cookbooks and role-based access control (RBAC).
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Downloading Chef Manage**
|
||||
|
||||
Copy the link for Chef Manage from the official web site and download the chef manage package.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# wget https://web-dl.packagecloud.io/chef/stable/packages/ubuntu/trusty/opscode-manage_1.17.0-1_amd64.deb
|
||||
|
||||
**2) Installing Chef Manage**
|
||||
|
||||
Let's install it into the root's home directory with below command.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# chef-server-ctl install opscode-manage --path /root
|
||||
|
||||
**3) Restart Chef Manage and Server**
|
||||
|
||||
Once the installation is complete we need to restart chef manage and chef server services by executing following commands.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# opscode-manage-ctl reconfigure
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# chef-server-ctl reconfigure
|
||||
|
||||
### Chef Manage Web Console ###
|
||||
|
||||
We can access chef manage web console from the localhost as wel as its fqdn and login with the already created admin user account.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Create New Organization with Chef Manage**
|
||||
|
||||
You would be asked to create new organization or accept the invitation from the organizations. Let's create a new organization by providing its short and full name as shown.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**2) Create New Organization with Command line**
|
||||
|
||||
We can also create new Organization from the command line by executing the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# chef-server-ctl org-create linux Linoxide Linux Org. --association_user kashi --filename linux.pem
|
||||
|
||||
### Configuration and setup of Workstation ###
|
||||
|
||||
As we had done with successful installation of chef server now we are going to setup its workstation to create and configure any recipes, cookbooks, attributes, and other changes that we want to made to our Chef configurations.
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Create New User and Organization on Chef Server**
|
||||
|
||||
In order to setup workstation we create a new user and an organization for this from the command line.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# chef-server-ctl user-create bloger Bloger Kashif bloger.kashif@gmail.com bloger123 --filename bloger.pem
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# chef-server-ctl org-create blogs Linoxide Blogs Inc. --association_user bloger --filename blogs.pem
|
||||
|
||||
**2) Download Starter Kit for Workstation**
|
||||
|
||||
Now Download and Save starter-kit from the chef manage web console on a workstation and use it to work with Chef server.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**3) Click to "Proceed" with starter kit download**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Chef Development Kit Setup for Workstation ###
|
||||
|
||||
Chef Development Kit is a software package suite with all the development tools need to code Chef. It combines with the best of the breed tools developed by Chef community with Chef Client.
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Downloading Chef DK**
|
||||
|
||||
We can Download chef development kit from its official web link and choose the required operating system to get its chef development tool kit.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Copy the link and download it with wget command.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:~# wget https://opscode-omnibus-packages.s3.amazonaws.com/ubuntu/12.04/x86_64/chefdk_0.6.2-1_amd64.deb
|
||||
|
||||
**1) Chef Development Kit Installatoion**
|
||||
|
||||
Install chef-development kit using dpkg command
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:~# dpkg -i chefdk_0.6.2-1_amd64.deb
|
||||
|
||||
**3) Chef DK Verfication**
|
||||
|
||||
Verify using the below command that the client got installed properly.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:~# chef verify
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Running verification for component 'berkshelf'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'test-kitchen'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'chef-client'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'chef-dk'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'chefspec'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'rubocop'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'fauxhai'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'knife-spork'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'kitchen-vagrant'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'package installation'
|
||||
Running verification for component 'openssl'
|
||||
..............
|
||||
---------------------------------------------
|
||||
Verification of component 'rubocop' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'knife-spork' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'openssl' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'berkshelf' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'chef-dk' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'fauxhai' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'test-kitchen' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'kitchen-vagrant' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'chef-client' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'chefspec' succeeded.
|
||||
Verification of component 'package installation' succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
**Connecting to Chef Server**
|
||||
|
||||
We will Create ~/.chef and copy the two user and organization pem files to this folder from chef server.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-14-chef:~# scp bloger.pem blogs.pem kashi.pem linux.pem root@172.25.10.172:/.chef/
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
root@172.25.10.172's password:
|
||||
bloger.pem 100% 1674 1.6KB/s 00:00
|
||||
blogs.pem 100% 1674 1.6KB/s 00:00
|
||||
kashi.pem 100% 1678 1.6KB/s 00:00
|
||||
linux.pem 100% 1678 1.6KB/s 00:00
|
||||
|
||||
**Knife Configurations to Manage your Chef Environment**
|
||||
|
||||
Now create "~/.chef/knife.rb" with following content as configured in previous steps.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:/.chef# vim knife.rb
|
||||
current_dir = File.dirname(__FILE__)
|
||||
|
||||
log_level :info
|
||||
log_location STDOUT
|
||||
node_name "kashi"
|
||||
client_key "#{current_dir}/kashi.pem"
|
||||
validation_client_name "kashi-linux"
|
||||
validation_key "#{current_dir}/linux.pem"
|
||||
chef_server_url "https://172.25.10.173/organizations/linux"
|
||||
cache_type 'BasicFile'
|
||||
cache_options( :path => "#{ENV['HOME']}/.chef/checksums" )
|
||||
cookbook_path ["#{current_dir}/../cookbooks"]
|
||||
|
||||
Create "~/cookbooks" folder for cookbooks as specified knife.rb file.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:/# mkdir cookbooks
|
||||
|
||||
**Testing with Knife Configurations**
|
||||
|
||||
Run "knife user list" and "knife client list" commands to verify whether knife configuration is working.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:/.chef# knife user list
|
||||
|
||||
You might get the following error while first time you run this command.This occurs because we do not have our Chef server's SSL certificate on our workstation.
|
||||
|
||||
ERROR: SSL Validation failure connecting to host: 172.25.10.173 - SSL_connect returned=1 errno=0 state=SSLv3 read server certificate B: certificate verify failed
|
||||
ERROR: Could not establish a secure connection to the server.
|
||||
Use `knife ssl check` to troubleshoot your SSL configuration.
|
||||
If your Chef Server uses a self-signed certificate, you can use
|
||||
`knife ssl fetch` to make knife trust the server's certificates.
|
||||
|
||||
To recover from the above error run the following command to fetch ssl certs and once again run the knife user and client list command and it should be fine then.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:/.chef# knife ssl fetch
|
||||
WARNING: Certificates from 172.25.10.173 will be fetched and placed in your trusted_cert
|
||||
directory (/.chef/trusted_certs).
|
||||
|
||||
Knife has no means to verify these are the correct certificates. You should
|
||||
verify the authenticity of these certificates after downloading.
|
||||
|
||||
Adding certificate for ubuntu-14-chef.test.com in /.chef/trusted_certs/ubuntu-14-chef_test_com.crt
|
||||
|
||||
Now after fetching ssl certs with above command, let's again run the below command.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:/.chef#knife client list
|
||||
kashi-linux
|
||||
|
||||
### New Node Configuration to interact with chef-server ###
|
||||
|
||||
Nodes contain chef-client which performs all the infrastructure automation. So, Its time to begin with adding new servers to our chef environment by Configuring a new node to interact with chef-server after we had Configured chef-server and knife workstation combinations.
|
||||
|
||||
To configure a new node to work with chef server use below command.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:~# knife bootstrap 172.25.10.170 --ssh-user root --ssh-password kashi123 --node-name mydns
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Doing old-style registration with the validation key at /.chef/linux.pem...
|
||||
Delete your validation key in order to use your user credentials instead
|
||||
|
||||
Connecting to 172.25.10.170
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Installing Chef Client...
|
||||
172.25.10.170 --2015-07-04 22:21:16-- https://www.opscode.com/chef/install.sh
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Resolving www.opscode.com (www.opscode.com)... 184.106.28.91
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Connecting to www.opscode.com (www.opscode.com)|184.106.28.91|:443... connected.
|
||||
172.25.10.170 HTTP request sent, awaiting response... 200 OK
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Length: 18736 (18K) [application/x-sh]
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Saving to: ‘STDOUT’
|
||||
172.25.10.170
|
||||
100%[======================================>] 18,736 --.-K/s in 0s
|
||||
172.25.10.170
|
||||
172.25.10.170 2015-07-04 22:21:17 (200 MB/s) - written to stdout [18736/18736]
|
||||
172.25.10.170
|
||||
172.25.10.170 Downloading Chef 12 for ubuntu...
|
||||
172.25.10.170 downloading https://www.opscode.com/chef/metadata?v=12&prerelease=false&nightlies=false&p=ubuntu&pv=14.04&m=x86_64
|
||||
172.25.10.170 to file /tmp/install.sh.26024/metadata.txt
|
||||
172.25.10.170 trying wget...
|
||||
|
||||
After all we can see the vewly created node under the knife node list and new client list as it it will also creates a new client with the node.
|
||||
|
||||
root@ubuntu-15-WKS:~# knife node list
|
||||
mydns
|
||||
|
||||
Similarly we can add multiple number of nodes to our chef infrastructure by providing ssh credentials with the same above knofe bootstrap command.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
In this detailed article we learnt about the Chef Configuration Management tool with its basic understanding and overview of its components with installation and configuration settings. We hope you have enjoyed learning the installation and configuration of Chef server with its workstation and client nodes.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://linoxide.com/ubuntu-how-to/install-configure-chef-ubuntu-14-04-15-04/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Kashif Siddique][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://linoxide.com/author/kashifs/
|
||||
237
sources/tech/20150717 How to collect NGINX metrics - Part 2.md
Normal file
237
sources/tech/20150717 How to collect NGINX metrics - Part 2.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
|
||||
How to collect NGINX metrics - Part 2
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### How to get the NGINX metrics you need ###
|
||||
|
||||
How you go about capturing metrics depends on which version of NGINX you are using, as well as which metrics you wish to access. (See [the companion article][1] for an in-depth exploration of NGINX metrics.) Free, open-source NGINX and the commercial product NGINX Plus both have status modules that report metrics, and NGINX can also be configured to report certain metrics in its logs:
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: center;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: center;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: center;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th rowspan="2" style="text-align: left;">Metric</th>
|
||||
<th colspan="3" style="text-align: center;">Availability</th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: center;"><a href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#open-source">NGINX (open-source)</a></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: center;"><a href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#plus">NGINX Plus</a></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: center;"><a href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#logs">NGINX logs</a></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">accepts / accepted</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">handled</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">dropped</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">active</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">requests / total</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">4xx codes</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">5xx codes</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">request time</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;"></td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: center;">x</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
#### Metrics collection: NGINX (open-source) ####
|
||||
|
||||
Open-source NGINX exposes several basic metrics about server activity on a simple status page, provided that you have the HTTP [stub status module][2] enabled. To check if the module is already enabled, run:
|
||||
|
||||
nginx -V 2>&1 | grep -o with-http_stub_status_module
|
||||
|
||||
The status module is enabled if you see with-http_stub_status_module as output in the terminal.
|
||||
|
||||
If that command returns no output, you will need to enable the status module. You can use the --with-http_stub_status_module configuration parameter when [building NGINX from source][3]:
|
||||
|
||||
./configure \
|
||||
… \
|
||||
--with-http_stub_status_module
|
||||
make
|
||||
sudo make install
|
||||
|
||||
After verifying the module is enabled or enabling it yourself, you will also need to modify your NGINX configuration to set up a locally accessible URL (e.g., /nginx_status) for the status page:
|
||||
|
||||
server {
|
||||
location /nginx_status {
|
||||
stub_status on;
|
||||
|
||||
access_log off;
|
||||
allow 127.0.0.1;
|
||||
deny all;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Note: The server blocks of the NGINX config are usually found not in the master configuration file (e.g., /etc/nginx/nginx.conf) but in supplemental configuration files that are referenced by the master config. To find the relevant configuration files, first locate the master config by running:
|
||||
|
||||
nginx -t
|
||||
|
||||
Open the master configuration file listed, and look for lines beginning with include near the end of the http block, such as:
|
||||
|
||||
include /etc/nginx/conf.d/*.conf;
|
||||
|
||||
In one of the referenced config files you should find the main server block, which you can modify as above to configure NGINX metrics reporting. After changing any configurations, reload the configs by executing:
|
||||
|
||||
nginx -s reload
|
||||
|
||||
Now you can view the status page to see your metrics:
|
||||
|
||||
Active connections: 24
|
||||
server accepts handled requests
|
||||
1156958 1156958 4491319
|
||||
Reading: 0 Writing: 18 Waiting : 6
|
||||
|
||||
Note that if you are trying to access the status page from a remote machine, you will need to whitelist the remote machine’s IP address in your status configuration, just as 127.0.0.1 is whitelisted in the configuration snippet above.
|
||||
|
||||
The NGINX status page is an easy way to get a quick snapshot of your metrics, but for continuous monitoring you will need to automatically record that data at regular intervals. Parsers for the NGINX status page already exist for monitoring tools such as [Nagios][4] and [Datadog][5], as well as for the statistics collection daemon [collectD][6].
|
||||
|
||||
#### Metrics collection: NGINX Plus ####
|
||||
|
||||
The commercial NGINX Plus provides [many more metrics][7] through its ngx_http_status_module than are available in open-source NGINX. Among the additional metrics exposed by NGINX Plus are bytes streamed, as well as information about upstream systems and caches. NGINX Plus also reports counts of all HTTP status code types (1xx, 2xx, 3xx, 4xx, 5xx). A sample NGINX Plus status board is available [here][8].
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*Note: the “Active” connections on the NGINX Plus status dashboard are defined slightly differently than the Active state connections in the metrics collected via the open-source NGINX stub status module. In NGINX Plus metrics, Active connections do not include connections in the Waiting state (aka Idle connections).*
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX Plus also reports [metrics in JSON format][9] for easy integration with other monitoring systems. With NGINX Plus, you can see the metrics and health status [for a given upstream grouping of servers][10], or drill down to get a count of just the response codes [from a single server][11] in that upstream:
|
||||
|
||||
{"1xx":0,"2xx":3483032,"3xx":0,"4xx":23,"5xx":0,"total":3483055}
|
||||
|
||||
To enable the NGINX Plus metrics dashboard, you can add a status server block inside the http block of your NGINX configuration. ([See the section above][12] on collecting metrics from open-source NGINX for instructions on locating the relevant config files.) For example, to set up a status dashboard at http://your.ip.address:8080/status.html and a JSON interface at http://your.ip.address:8080/status, you would add the following server block:
|
||||
|
||||
server {
|
||||
listen 8080;
|
||||
root /usr/share/nginx/html;
|
||||
|
||||
location /status {
|
||||
status;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
location = /status.html {
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
The status pages should be live once you reload your NGINX configuration:
|
||||
|
||||
nginx -s reload
|
||||
|
||||
The official NGINX Plus docs have [more details][13] on how to configure the expanded status module.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Metrics collection: NGINX logs ####
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX’s [log module][14] writes configurable access logs to a destination of your choosing. You can customize the format of your logs and the data they contain by [adding or subtracting variables][15]. The simplest way to capture detailed logs is to add the following line in the server block of your config file (see [the section][16] on collecting metrics from open-source NGINX for instructions on locating your config files):
|
||||
|
||||
access_log logs/host.access.log combined;
|
||||
|
||||
After changing any NGINX configurations, reload the configs by executing:
|
||||
|
||||
nginx -s reload
|
||||
|
||||
The “combined” log format, included by default, captures [a number of key data points][17], such as the actual HTTP request and the corresponding response code. In the example logs below, NGINX logged a 200 (success) status code for a request for /index.html and a 404 (not found) error for the nonexistent /fail.
|
||||
|
||||
127.0.0.1 - - [19/Feb/2015:12:10:46 -0500] "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1" 200 612 "-" "Mozilla/5.0 (Macintosh; Intel Mac OS X 10_10_1) AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko) Chrome/40.0.2214.111 Safari 537.36"
|
||||
|
||||
127.0.0.1 - - [19/Feb/2015:12:11:05 -0500] "GET /fail HTTP/1.1" 404 570 "-" "Mozilla/5.0 (Macintosh; Intel Mac OS X 10_10_1) AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko) Chrome/40.0.2214.111 Safari/537.36"
|
||||
|
||||
You can log request processing time as well by adding a new log format to the http block of your NGINX config file:
|
||||
|
||||
log_format nginx '$remote_addr - $remote_user [$time_local] '
|
||||
'"$request" $status $body_bytes_sent $request_time '
|
||||
'"$http_referer" "$http_user_agent"';
|
||||
|
||||
And by adding or modifying the access_log line in the server block of your config file:
|
||||
|
||||
access_log logs/host.access.log nginx;
|
||||
|
||||
After reloading the updated configs (by running nginx -s reload), your access logs will include response times, as seen below. The units are seconds, with millisecond resolution. In this instance, the server received a request for /big.pdf, returning a 206 (success) status code after sending 33973115 bytes. Processing the request took 0.202 seconds (202 milliseconds):
|
||||
|
||||
127.0.0.1 - - [19/Feb/2015:15:50:36 -0500] "GET /big.pdf HTTP/1.1" 206 33973115 0.202 "-" "Mozilla/5.0 (Macintosh; Intel Mac OS X 10_10_1) AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko) Chrome/40.0.2214.111 Safari/537.36"
|
||||
|
||||
You can use a variety of tools and services to parse and analyze NGINX logs. For instance, [rsyslog][18] can monitor your logs and pass them to any number of log-analytics services; you can use a free, open-source tool such as [logstash][19] to collect and analyze logs; or you can use a unified logging layer such as [Fluentd][20] to collect and parse your NGINX logs.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
Which NGINX metrics you monitor will depend on the tools available to you, and whether the insight provided by a given metric justifies the overhead of monitoring that metric. For instance, is measuring error rates important enough to your organization to justify investing in NGINX Plus or implementing a system to capture and analyze logs?
|
||||
|
||||
At Datadog, we have built integrations with both NGINX and NGINX Plus so that you can begin collecting and monitoring metrics from all your web servers with a minimum of setup. Learn how to monitor NGINX with Datadog [in this post][21], and get started right away with a [free trial of Datadog][22].
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Source Markdown for this post is available [on GitHub][23]. Questions, corrections, additions, etc.? Please [let us know][24].
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：K Young
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/
|
||||
[2]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_stub_status_module.html
|
||||
[3]:http://wiki.nginx.org/InstallOptions
|
||||
[4]:https://exchange.nagios.org/directory/Plugins/Web-Servers/nginx
|
||||
[5]:http://docs.datadoghq.com/integrations/nginx/
|
||||
[6]:https://collectd.org/wiki/index.php/Plugin:nginx
|
||||
[7]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_status_module.html#data
|
||||
[8]:http://demo.nginx.com/status.html
|
||||
[9]:http://demo.nginx.com/status
|
||||
[10]:http://demo.nginx.com/status/upstreams/demoupstreams
|
||||
[11]:http://demo.nginx.com/status/upstreams/demoupstreams/0/responses
|
||||
[12]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#open-source
|
||||
[13]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_status_module.html#example
|
||||
[14]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_log_module.html
|
||||
[15]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_log_module.html#log_format
|
||||
[16]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#open-source
|
||||
[17]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/http/ngx_http_log_module.html#log_format
|
||||
[18]:http://www.rsyslog.com/
|
||||
[19]:https://www.elastic.co/products/logstash
|
||||
[20]:http://www.fluentd.org/
|
||||
[21]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx-with-datadog/
|
||||
[22]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#sign-up
|
||||
[23]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/blob/master/nginx/how_to_collect_nginx_metrics.md
|
||||
[24]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/issues
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
|
||||
How to monitor NGINX with Datadog - Part 3
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you’ve already read [our post on monitoring NGINX][1], you know how much information you can gain about your web environment from just a handful of metrics. And you’ve also seen just how easy it is to start collecting metrics from NGINX on ad hoc basis. But to implement comprehensive, ongoing NGINX monitoring, you will need a robust monitoring system to store and visualize your metrics, and to alert you when anomalies happen. In this post, we’ll show you how to set up NGINX monitoring in Datadog so that you can view your metrics on customizable dashboards like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Datadog allows you to build graphs and alerts around individual hosts, services, processes, metrics—or virtually any combination thereof. For instance, you can monitor all of your NGINX hosts, or all hosts in a certain availability zone, or you can monitor a single key metric being reported by all hosts with a certain tag. This post will show you how to:
|
||||
|
||||
- Monitor NGINX metrics on Datadog dashboards, alongside all your other systems
|
||||
- Set up automated alerts to notify you when a key metric changes dramatically
|
||||
|
||||
### Configuring NGINX ###
|
||||
|
||||
To collect metrics from NGINX, you first need to ensure that NGINX has an enabled status module and a URL for reporting its status metrics. Step-by-step instructions [for configuring open-source NGINX][2] and [NGINX Plus][3] are available in our companion post on metric collection.
|
||||
|
||||
### Integrating Datadog and NGINX ###
|
||||
|
||||
#### Install the Datadog Agent ####
|
||||
|
||||
The Datadog Agent is [the open-source software][4] that collects and reports metrics from your hosts so that you can view and monitor them in Datadog. Installing the agent usually takes [just a single command][5].
|
||||
|
||||
As soon as your Agent is up and running, you should see your host reporting metrics [in your Datadog account][6].
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#### Configure the Agent ####
|
||||
|
||||
Next you’ll need to create a simple NGINX configuration file for the Agent. The location of the Agent’s configuration directory for your OS can be found [here][7].
|
||||
|
||||
Inside that directory, at conf.d/nginx.yaml.example, you will find [a sample NGINX config file][8] that you can edit to provide the status URL and optional tags for each of your NGINX instances:
|
||||
|
||||
init_config:
|
||||
|
||||
instances:
|
||||
|
||||
- nginx_status_url: http://localhost/nginx_status/
|
||||
tags:
|
||||
- instance:foo
|
||||
|
||||
Once you have supplied the status URLs and any tags, save the config file as conf.d/nginx.yaml.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Restart the Agent ####
|
||||
|
||||
You must restart the Agent to load your new configuration file. The restart command varies somewhat by platform—see the specific commands for your platform [here][9].
|
||||
|
||||
#### Verify the configuration settings ####
|
||||
|
||||
To check that Datadog and NGINX are properly integrated, run the Datadog info command. The command for each platform is available [here][10].
|
||||
|
||||
If the configuration is correct, you will see a section like this in the output:
|
||||
|
||||
Checks
|
||||
======
|
||||
|
||||
[...]
|
||||
|
||||
nginx
|
||||
-----
|
||||
- instance #0 [OK]
|
||||
- Collected 8 metrics & 0 events
|
||||
|
||||
#### Install the integration ####
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, switch on the NGINX integration inside your Datadog account. It’s as simple as clicking the “Install Integration” button under the Configuration tab in the [NGINX integration settings][11].
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Metrics! ###
|
||||
|
||||
Once the Agent begins reporting NGINX metrics, you will see [an NGINX dashboard][12] among your list of available dashboards in Datadog.
|
||||
|
||||
The basic NGINX dashboard displays a handful of graphs encapsulating most of the key metrics highlighted [in our introduction to NGINX monitoring][13]. (Some metrics, notably request processing time, require log analysis and are not available in Datadog.)
|
||||
|
||||
You can easily create a comprehensive dashboard for monitoring your entire web stack by adding additional graphs with important metrics from outside NGINX. For example, you might want to monitor host-level metrics on your NGINX hosts, such as system load. To start building a custom dashboard, simply clone the default NGINX dashboard by clicking on the gear near the upper right of the dashboard and selecting “Clone Dash”.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can also monitor your NGINX instances at a higher level using Datadog’s [Host Maps][14]—for instance, color-coding all your NGINX hosts by CPU usage to identify potential hotspots.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### Alerting on NGINX metrics ###
|
||||
|
||||
Once Datadog is capturing and visualizing your metrics, you will likely want to set up some monitors to automatically keep tabs on your metrics—and to alert you when there are problems. Below we’ll walk through a representative example: a metric monitor that alerts on sudden drops in NGINX throughput.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Monitor your NGINX throughput ####
|
||||
|
||||
Datadog metric alerts can be threshold-based (alert when the metric exceeds a set value) or change-based (alert when the metric changes by a certain amount). In this case we’ll take the latter approach, alerting when our incoming requests per second drop precipitously. Such drops are often indicative of problems.
|
||||
|
||||
1.**Create a new metric monitor**. Select “New Monitor” from the “Monitors” dropdown in Datadog. Select “Metric” as the monitor type.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.**Define your metric monitor**. We want to know when our total NGINX requests per second drop by a certain amount. So we define the metric of interest to be the sum of nginx.net.request_per_s across our infrastructure.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.**Set metric alert conditions**. Since we want to alert on a change, rather than on a fixed threshold, we select “Change Alert.” We’ll set the monitor to alert us whenever the request volume drops by 30 percent or more. Here we use a one-minute window of data to represent the metric’s value “now” and alert on the average change across that interval, as compared to the metric’s value 10 minutes prior.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4.**Customize the notification**. If our NGINX request volume drops, we want to notify our team. In this case we will post a notification in the ops team’s chat room and page the engineer on call. In “Say what’s happening”, we name the monitor and add a short message that will accompany the notification to suggest a first step for investigation. We @mention the Slack channel that we use for ops and use @pagerduty to [route the alert to PagerDuty][15]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.**Save the integration monitor**. Click the “Save” button at the bottom of the page. You’re now monitoring a key NGINX [work metric][16], and your on-call engineer will be paged anytime it drops rapidly.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
In this post we’ve walked you through integrating NGINX with Datadog to visualize your key metrics and notify your team when your web infrastructure shows signs of trouble.
|
||||
|
||||
If you’ve followed along using your own Datadog account, you should now have greatly improved visibility into what’s happening in your web environment, as well as the ability to create automated monitors tailored to your environment, your usage patterns, and the metrics that are most valuable to your organization.
|
||||
|
||||
If you don’t yet have a Datadog account, you can sign up for [a free trial][17] and start monitoring your infrastructure, your applications, and your services today.
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Source Markdown for this post is available [on GitHub][18]. Questions, corrections, additions, etc.? Please [let us know][19].
|
||||
|
||||
------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx-with-datadog/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：K Young
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/
|
||||
[2]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#open-source
|
||||
[3]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/#plus
|
||||
[4]:https://github.com/DataDog/dd-agent
|
||||
[5]:https://app.datadoghq.com/account/settings#agent
|
||||
[6]:https://app.datadoghq.com/infrastructure
|
||||
[7]:http://docs.datadoghq.com/guides/basic_agent_usage/
|
||||
[8]:https://github.com/DataDog/dd-agent/blob/master/conf.d/nginx.yaml.example
|
||||
[9]:http://docs.datadoghq.com/guides/basic_agent_usage/
|
||||
[10]:http://docs.datadoghq.com/guides/basic_agent_usage/
|
||||
[11]:https://app.datadoghq.com/account/settings#integrations/nginx
|
||||
[12]:https://app.datadoghq.com/dash/integration/nginx
|
||||
[13]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/
|
||||
[14]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/introducing-host-maps-know-thy-infrastructure/
|
||||
[15]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/pagerduty/
|
||||
[16]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/#metrics
|
||||
[17]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx-with-datadog/#sign-up
|
||||
[18]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/blob/master/nginx/how_to_monitor_nginx_with_datadog.md
|
||||
[19]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/issues
|
||||
408
sources/tech/20150717 How to monitor NGINX- Part 1.md
Normal file
408
sources/tech/20150717 How to monitor NGINX- Part 1.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,408 @@
|
||||
How to monitor NGINX - Part 1
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### What is NGINX? ###
|
||||
|
||||
[NGINX][1] (pronounced “engine X”) is a popular HTTP server and reverse proxy server. As an HTTP server, NGINX serves static content very efficiently and reliably, using relatively little memory. As a [reverse proxy][2], it can be used as a single, controlled point of access for multiple back-end servers or for additional applications such as caching and load balancing. NGINX is available as a free, open-source product or in a more full-featured, commercially distributed version called NGINX Plus.
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX can also be used as a mail proxy and a generic TCP proxy, but this article does not directly address NGINX monitoring for these use cases.
|
||||
|
||||
### Key NGINX metrics ###
|
||||
|
||||
By monitoring NGINX you can catch two categories of issues: resource issues within NGINX itself, and also problems developing elsewhere in your web infrastructure. Some of the metrics most NGINX users will benefit from monitoring include **requests per second**, which provides a high-level view of combined end-user activity; **server error rate**, which indicates how often your servers are failing to process seemingly valid requests; and **request processing time**, which describes how long your servers are taking to process client requests (and which can point to slowdowns or other problems in your environment).
|
||||
|
||||
More generally, there are at least three key categories of metrics to watch:
|
||||
|
||||
- Basic activity metrics
|
||||
- Error metrics
|
||||
- Performance metrics
|
||||
|
||||
Below we’ll break down a few of the most important NGINX metrics in each category, as well as metrics for a fairly common use case that deserves special mention: using NGINX Plus for reverse proxying. We will also describe how you can monitor all of these metrics with your graphing or monitoring tools of choice.
|
||||
|
||||
This article references metric terminology [introduced in our Monitoring 101 series][3], which provides a framework for metric collection and alerting.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Basic activity metrics ####
|
||||
|
||||
Whatever your NGINX use case, you will no doubt want to monitor how many client requests your servers are receiving and how those requests are being processed.
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX Plus can report basic activity metrics exactly like open-source NGINX, but it also provides a secondary module that reports metrics slightly differently. We discuss open-source NGINX first, then the additional reporting capabilities provided by NGINX Plus.
|
||||
|
||||
**NGINX**
|
||||
|
||||
The diagram below shows the lifecycle of a client connection and how the open-source version of NGINX collects metrics during a connection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Accepts, handled, and requests are ever-increasing counters. Active, waiting, reading, and writing grow and shrink with request volume.
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Name</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Description</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong><a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/">Metric type</a></strong></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">accepts</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of client connections attempted by NGINX</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">handled</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of successful client connections</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">active</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Currently active client connections</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">dropped (calculated)</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of dropped connections (accepts – handled)</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Errors*</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">requests</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of client requests</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Throughput</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td colspan="3" style="text-align: left;">*<em>Strictly speaking, dropped connections is <a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/#resource-metrics">a metric of resource saturation</a>, but since saturation causes NGINX to stop servicing some work (rather than queuing it up for later), “dropped” is best thought of as <a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/#work-metrics">a work metric</a>.</em></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
The **accepts** counter is incremented when an NGINX worker picks up a request for a connection from the OS, whereas **handled** is incremented when the worker actually gets a connection for the request (by establishing a new connection or reusing an open one). These two counts are usually the same—any divergence indicates that connections are being **dropped**, often because a resource limit, such as NGINX’s [worker_connections][4] limit, has been reached.
|
||||
|
||||
Once NGINX successfully handles a connection, the connection moves to an **active** state, where it remains as client requests are processed:
|
||||
|
||||
Active state
|
||||
|
||||
- **Waiting**: An active connection may also be in a Waiting substate if there is no active request at the moment. New connections can bypass this state and move directly to Reading, most commonly when using “accept filter” or “deferred accept”, in which case NGINX does not receive notice of work until it has enough data to begin working on the response. Connections will also be in the Waiting state after sending a response if the connection is set to keep-alive.
|
||||
- **Reading**: When a request is received, the connection moves out of the waiting state, and the request itself is counted as Reading. In this state NGINX is reading a client request header. Request headers are lightweight, so this is usually a fast operation.
|
||||
- **Writing**: After the request is read, it is counted as Writing, and remains in that state until a response is returned to the client. That means that the request is Writing while NGINX is waiting for results from upstream systems (systems “behind” NGINX), and while NGINX is operating on the response. Requests will often spend the majority of their time in the Writing state.
|
||||
|
||||
Often a connection will only support one request at a time. In this case, the number of Active connections == Waiting connections + Reading requests + Writing requests. However, the newer SPDY and HTTP/2 protocols allow multiple concurrent requests/responses to be multiplexed over a connection, so Active may be less than the sum of Waiting, Reading, and Writing. (As of this writing, NGINX does not support HTTP/2, but expects to add support during 2015.)
|
||||
|
||||
**NGINX Plus**
|
||||
|
||||
As mentioned above, all of open-source NGINX’s metrics are available within NGINX Plus, but Plus can also report additional metrics. The section covers the metrics that are only available from NGINX Plus.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Accepted, dropped, and total are ever-increasing counters. Active, idle, and current track the current number of connections or requests in each of those states, so they grow and shrink with request volume.
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Name</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Description</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong><a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/">Metric type</a></strong></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">accepted</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of client connections attempted by NGINX</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">dropped</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of dropped connections</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Errors*</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">active</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Currently active client connections</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">idle</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Client connections with zero current requests</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">total</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of client requests</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Throughput</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td colspan="3" style="text-align: left;">*<em>Strictly speaking, dropped connections is a metric of resource saturation, but since saturation causes NGINX to stop servicing some work (rather than queuing it up for later), “dropped” is best thought of as a work metric.</em></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
The **accepted** counter is incremented when an NGINX Plus worker picks up a request for a connection from the OS. If the worker fails to get a connection for the request (by establishing a new connection or reusing an open one), then the connection is dropped and **dropped** is incremented. Ordinarily connections are dropped because a resource limit, such as NGINX Plus’s [worker_connections][4] limit, has been reached.
|
||||
|
||||
**Active** and **idle** are the same as “active” and “waiting” states in open-source NGINX as described [above][5], with one key exception: in open-source NGINX, “waiting” falls under the “active” umbrella, whereas in NGINX Plus “idle” connections are excluded from the “active” count. **Current** is the same as the combined “reading + writing” states in open-source NGINX.
|
||||
|
||||
**Total** is a cumulative count of client requests. Note that a single client connection can involve multiple requests, so this number may be significantly larger than the cumulative number of connections. In fact, (total / accepted) yields the average number of requests per connection.
|
||||
|
||||
**Metric differences between Open-Source and Plus**
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;">NGINX (open-source)</th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;">NGINX Plus</th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">accepts</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">accepted</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">dropped must be calculated</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">dropped is reported directly</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">reading + writing</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">current</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">waiting</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">idle</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">active (includes “waiting” states)</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">active (excludes “idle” states)</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">requests</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">total</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
**Metric to alert on: Dropped connections**
|
||||
|
||||
The number of connections that have been dropped is equal to the difference between accepts and handled (NGINX) or is exposed directly as a standard metric (NGINX Plus). Under normal circumstances, dropped connections should be zero. If your rate of dropped connections per unit time starts to rise, look for possible resource saturation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**Metric to alert on: Requests per second**
|
||||
|
||||
Sampling your request data (**requests** in open-source, or **total** in Plus) with a fixed time interval provides you with the number of requests you’re receiving per unit of time—often minutes or seconds. Monitoring this metric can alert you to spikes in incoming web traffic, whether legitimate or nefarious, or sudden drops, which are usually indicative of problems. A drastic change in requests per second can alert you to problems brewing somewhere in your environment, even if it cannot tell you exactly where those problems lie. Note that all requests are counted the same, regardless of their URLs.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
**Collecting activity metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
Open-source NGINX exposes these basic server metrics on a simple status page. Because the status information is displayed in a standardized form, virtually any graphing or monitoring tool can be configured to parse the relevant data for analysis, visualization, or alerting. NGINX Plus provides a JSON feed with much richer data. Read the companion post on [NGINX metrics collection][6] for instructions on enabling metrics collection.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Error metrics ####
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Name</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Description</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong><a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/">Metric type</a></strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Availability</strong></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">4xx codes</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of client errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX logs, NGINX Plus</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">5xx codes</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Count of server errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX logs, NGINX Plus</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX error metrics tell you how often your servers are returning errors instead of producing useful work. Client errors are represented by 4xx status codes, server errors with 5xx status codes.
|
||||
|
||||
**Metric to alert on: Server error rate**
|
||||
|
||||
Your server error rate is equal to the number of 5xx errors divided by the total number of [status codes][7] (1xx, 2xx, 3xx, 4xx, 5xx), per unit of time (often one to five minutes). If your error rate starts to climb over time, investigation may be in order. If it spikes suddenly, urgent action may be required, as clients are likely to report errors to the end user.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A note on client errors: while it is tempting to monitor 4xx, there is limited information you can derive from that metric since it measures client behavior without offering any insight into particular URLs. In other words, a change in 4xx could be noise, e.g. web scanners blindly looking for vulnerabilities.
|
||||
|
||||
**Collecting error metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
Although open-source NGINX does not make error rates immediately available for monitoring, there are at least two ways to capture that information:
|
||||
|
||||
- Use the expanded status module available with commercially supported NGINX Plus
|
||||
- Configure NGINX’s log module to write response codes in access logs
|
||||
|
||||
Read the companion post on NGINX metrics collection for detailed instructions on both approaches.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Performance metrics ####
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Name</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Description</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong><a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/">Metric type</a></strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Availability</strong></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">request time</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Time to process each request, in seconds</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Performance</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX logs</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
**Metric to alert on: Request processing time**
|
||||
|
||||
The request time metric logged by NGINX records the processing time for each request, from the reading of the first client bytes to fulfilling the request. Long response times can point to problems upstream.
|
||||
|
||||
**Collecting processing time metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX and NGINX Plus users can capture data on processing time by adding the $request_time variable to the access log format. More details on configuring logs for monitoring are available in our companion post on [NGINX metrics collection][8].
|
||||
|
||||
#### Reverse proxy metrics ####
|
||||
|
||||
注：表格
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<colgroup>
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;">
|
||||
<col style="text-align: left;"> </colgroup>
|
||||
<thead>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Name</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Description</strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong><a target="_blank" href="https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/">Metric type</a></strong></th>
|
||||
<th style="text-align: left;"><strong>Availability</strong></th>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</thead>
|
||||
<tbody>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Active connections by upstream server</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Currently active client connections</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Utilization</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX Plus</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">5xx codes by upstream server</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Server errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Work: Errors</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX Plus</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Available servers per upstream group</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Servers passing health checks</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">Resource: Availability</td>
|
||||
<td style="text-align: left;">NGINX Plus</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</tbody>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
One of the most common ways to use NGINX is as a [reverse proxy][9]. The commercially supported NGINX Plus exposes a large number of metrics about backend (or “upstream”) servers, which are relevant to a reverse proxy setup. This section highlights a few of the key upstream metrics that are available to users of NGINX Plus.
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX Plus segments its upstream metrics first by group, and then by individual server. So if, for example, your reverse proxy is distributing requests to five upstream web servers, you can see at a glance whether any of those individual servers is overburdened, and also whether you have enough healthy servers in the upstream group to ensure good response times.
|
||||
|
||||
**Activity metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
The number of **active connections per upstream server** can help you verify that your reverse proxy is properly distributing work across your server group. If you are using NGINX as a load balancer, significant deviations in the number of connections handled by any one server can indicate that the server is struggling to process requests in a timely manner or that the load-balancing method (e.g., [round-robin or IP hashing][10]) you have configured is not optimal for your traffic patterns
|
||||
|
||||
**Error metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
Recall from the error metric section above that 5xx (server error) codes are a valuable metric to monitor, particularly as a share of total response codes. NGINX Plus allows you to easily extract the number of **5xx codes per upstream server**, as well as the total number of responses, to determine that particular server’s error rate.
|
||||
|
||||
**Availability metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
For another view of the health of your web servers, NGINX also makes it simple to monitor the health of your upstream groups via the total number of **servers currently available within each group**. In a large reverse proxy setup, you may not care very much about the current state of any one server, just as long as your pool of available servers is capable of handling the load. But monitoring the total number of servers that are up within each upstream group can provide a very high-level view of the aggregate health of your web servers.
|
||||
|
||||
**Collecting upstream metrics**
|
||||
|
||||
NGINX Plus upstream metrics are exposed on the internal NGINX Plus monitoring dashboard, and are also available via a JSON interface that can serve up metrics into virtually any external monitoring platform. See examples in our companion post on [collecting NGINX metrics][11].
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
In this post we’ve touched on some of the most useful metrics you can monitor to keep tabs on your NGINX servers. If you are just getting started with NGINX, monitoring most or all of the metrics in the list below will provide good visibility into the health and activity levels of your web infrastructure:
|
||||
|
||||
- [Dropped connections][12]
|
||||
- [Requests per second][13]
|
||||
- [Server error rate][14]
|
||||
- [Request processing time][15]
|
||||
|
||||
Eventually you will recognize additional, more specialized metrics that are particularly relevant to your own infrastructure and use cases. Of course, what you monitor will depend on the tools you have and the metrics available to you. See the companion post for [step-by-step instructions on metric collection][16], whether you use NGINX or NGINX Plus.
|
||||
|
||||
At Datadog, we have built integrations with both NGINX and NGINX Plus so that you can begin collecting and monitoring metrics from all your web servers with a minimum of setup. Learn how to monitor NGINX with Datadog [in this post][17], and get started right away with [a free trial of Datadog][18].
|
||||
|
||||
### Acknowledgments ###
|
||||
|
||||
Many thanks to the NGINX team for reviewing this article prior to publication and providing important feedback and clarifications.
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Source Markdown for this post is available [on GitHub][19]. Questions, corrections, additions, etc.? Please [let us know][20].
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：K Young
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:http://nginx.org/en/
|
||||
[2]:http://nginx.com/resources/glossary/reverse-proxy-server/
|
||||
[3]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/monitoring-101-collecting-data/
|
||||
[4]:http://nginx.org/en/docs/ngx_core_module.html#worker_connections
|
||||
[5]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#active-state
|
||||
[6]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/
|
||||
[7]:http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec10.html
|
||||
[8]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/
|
||||
[9]:https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Reverse_proxy
|
||||
[10]:http://nginx.com/blog/load-balancing-with-nginx-plus/
|
||||
[11]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/
|
||||
[12]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#dropped-connections
|
||||
[13]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#requests-per-second
|
||||
[14]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#server-error-rate
|
||||
[15]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#request-processing-time
|
||||
[16]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-collect-nginx-metrics/
|
||||
[17]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx-with-datadog/
|
||||
[18]:https://www.datadoghq.com/blog/how-to-monitor-nginx/#sign-up
|
||||
[19]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/blob/master/nginx/how_to_monitor_nginx.md
|
||||
[20]:https://github.com/DataDog/the-monitor/issues
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
|
||||
zpl1025
|
||||
Howto Configure FTP Server with Proftpd on Fedora 22
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
In this article, we'll learn about setting up an FTP server with Proftpd running Fedora 22 in our machine or server. [ProFTPD][1] is a free and open source FTP daemon software licensed under GPL. It is among most popular FTP server among machines running Linux. Its primary design aims to have an FTP server with many advanced features and provisioning users for more configuration options for easy customization. It includes a number of configuration options that are still not available with many other FTP daemons. It was initially developed by the developers as an alternative with better security and configuration to wu-ftpd server. An FTP server is a program that allows us to upload or download files and folders from a remote server where it is setup using an FTP client. Some of the features of ProFTPD daemon are as follows, you can check more features on [http://www.proftpd.org/features.html][2] .
|
||||
|
||||
- It includes a per directory ".ftpaccess" access configuration similar to Apache's ".htaccess"
|
||||
- It features multiple virtual FTP server with multiple users login and anonymous FTP services.
|
||||
- It can be run either as a stand-alone server or from inetd/xinetd.
|
||||
- Its ownership, file/folder attributes and file/folder permissions are UNIX-based.
|
||||
- It can be run as standalone mode in order to protect the system from damage that can be caused from root access.
|
||||
- The modular design of it makes it easily extensible with modules like LDAP servers, SSL/TLS encryption, RADIUS support, etc.
|
||||
- IPv6 support is also included in the ProFTPD server.
|
||||
|
||||
Here are some easy to perform steps on how we can setup an FTP Server with ProFTPD in Fedora 22 operating system.
|
||||
|
||||
### 1. Installing ProFTPD ###
|
||||
|
||||
First of all, we'll wanna install Proftpd server in our box running Fedora 22 as its operating system. As yum package manager has been depreciated, we'll use the latest and greatest built package manager called dnf. DNF is pretty easy to use and highly user friendly package manager available in Fedora 22. We'll simply use it to install proftpd daemon server. To do so, we'll need to run the following command in a terminal or a console in sudo mode.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo dnf -y install proftpd proftpd-utils
|
||||
|
||||
### 2. Configuring ProFTPD ###
|
||||
|
||||
Now, we'll make changes to some configurations in the daemon. To configure the daemon, we will need to edit /etc/proftpd.conf with a text editor. The main configuration file of the ProFTPD daemon is **/etc/proftpd.conf** so, any changes made to this file will affect the FTP server. Here, are some changes we make in this initial step.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo vi /etc/proftpd.conf
|
||||
|
||||
Next, after we open the file using a text editor, we'll wanna make changes to the ServerName and ServerAdmin as hostname and email address respectively. Here's what we have made changes to those configs.
|
||||
|
||||
ServerName "ftp.linoxide.com"
|
||||
ServerAdmin arun@linoxide.com
|
||||
|
||||
After that, we'll wanna the following lines into the configuration file so that it logs access & auth into its specified log files.
|
||||
|
||||
ExtendedLog /var/log/proftpd/access.log WRITE,READ default
|
||||
ExtendedLog /var/log/proftpd/auth.log AUTH auth
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### 3. Adding FTP users ###
|
||||
|
||||
After configure the basics of the configuration file, we'll surely wanna create an FTP user which is rooted at a specific directory we want. The current users that we use to login into our machine are automatically enabled with the FTP service, we can even use it to login into the FTP server. But, in this tutorial, we'll gonna create a new user with a specified home directory to the ftp server.
|
||||
|
||||
Here, we'll create a new group named ftpgroup.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo groupadd ftpgroup
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll gonna add a new user arunftp into the group with home directory specified as /ftp-dir/
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo useradd -G ftpgroup arunftp -s /sbin/nologin -d /ftp-dir/
|
||||
|
||||
After the user has been created and added to the group, we'll wanna set a password to the user arunftp.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo passwd arunftp
|
||||
|
||||
Changing password for user arunftp.
|
||||
New password:
|
||||
Retype new password:
|
||||
passwd: all authentication tokens updated successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
Now, we'll set read and write permission of the home directory by the ftp users by executing the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo setsebool -P allow_ftpd_full_access=1
|
||||
$ sudo setsebool -P ftp_home_dir=1
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll wanna make that directory and its contents unable to get removed or renamed by any other users.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo chmod -R 1777 /ftp-dir/
|
||||
|
||||
### 4. Enabling TLS Support ###
|
||||
|
||||
FTP is considered less secure in comparison to the latest encryption methods used these days as anybody sniffing the network card can read the data pass through FTP. So, we'll enable TLS Encryption support in our FTP server. To do so, we'll need to a edit /etc/proftpd.conf configuration file. Before that, we'll wanna backup our existing configuration file to make sure we can revert our configuration if any unexpected happens.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo cp /etc/proftpd.conf /etc/proftpd.conf.bak
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll wanna edit the configuration file using our favorite text editor.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo vi /etc/proftpd.conf
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll wanna add the following lines just below line we configured in step 2 .
|
||||
|
||||
TLSEngine on
|
||||
TLSRequired on
|
||||
TLSProtocol SSLv23
|
||||
TLSLog /var/log/proftpd/tls.log
|
||||
TLSRSACertificateFile /etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem
|
||||
TLSRSACertificateKeyFile /etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
After finishing up with the configuration, we'll wanna save and exit it.
|
||||
|
||||
Next, we'll need to generate the SSL certificates inside **/etc/pki/tls/certs/** directory as proftpd.pem. To do so, first we'll need to install openssl in our Fedora 22 machine.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo dnf install openssl
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll gonna generate the SSL certificate by running the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo openssl req -x509 -nodes -newkey rsa:2048 -keyout /etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem -out /etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem
|
||||
|
||||
We'll be asked with some information that will be associated into the certificate. After completing the required information, it will generate a 2048 bit RSA private key.
|
||||
|
||||
Generating a 2048 bit RSA private key
|
||||
...................+++
|
||||
...................+++
|
||||
writing new private key to '/etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem'
|
||||
-----
|
||||
You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated
|
||||
into your certificate request.
|
||||
What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN.
|
||||
There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank
|
||||
For some fields there will be a default value,
|
||||
If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
|
||||
-----
|
||||
Country Name (2 letter code) [XX]:NP
|
||||
State or Province Name (full name) []:Narayani
|
||||
Locality Name (eg, city) [Default City]:Bharatpur
|
||||
Organization Name (eg, company) [Default Company Ltd]:Linoxide
|
||||
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:Linux Freedom
|
||||
Common Name (eg, your name or your server's hostname) []:ftp.linoxide.com
|
||||
Email Address []:arun@linoxide.com
|
||||
|
||||
After that, we'll gonna change the permission of the generated certificate file in order to secure it.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo chmod 600 /etc/pki/tls/certs/proftpd.pem
|
||||
|
||||
### 5. Allowing FTP through Firewall ###
|
||||
|
||||
Now, we'll need to allow the ftp ports that are usually blocked by the firewall by default. So, we'll allow ports and enable access to the ftp through firewall.
|
||||
|
||||
If **TLS/SSL Encryption is enabled** run the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
$sudo firewall-cmd --add-port=1024-65534/tcp
|
||||
$ sudo firewall-cmd --add-port=1024-65534/tcp --permanent
|
||||
|
||||
If **TLS/SSL Encryption is disabled** run the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=public --add-service=ftp
|
||||
|
||||
success
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll need to reload the firewall configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo firewall-cmd --reload
|
||||
|
||||
success
|
||||
|
||||
### 6. Starting and Enabling ProFTPD ###
|
||||
|
||||
After everything is set, we'll finally start our ProFTPD and give it a try. To start the proftpd ftp daemon, we'll need to run the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo systemctl start proftpd.service
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we'll wanna enable proftpd to start on every boot.
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo systemctl enable proftpd.service
|
||||
|
||||
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multi-user.target.wants/proftpd.service to /usr/lib/systemd/system/proftpd.service.
|
||||
|
||||
### 7. Logging into the FTP server ###
|
||||
|
||||
Now, if everything was configured and done as expected, we must be able to connect to the ftp server and login with the details we set above. Here, we'll gonna configure our FTP client, filezilla with hostname as **server's ip or url**, Protocol as **FTP**, User as **arunftp** and password as the one we set in above step 3. If you followed step 4 for enabling TLS support, then we'll need to set the Encryption type as **Require explicit FTP over TLS** but if you didn't follow step 4 and don't wanna use TLS encryption then set the Encryption type as **Plain FTP**.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To setup the above configuration, we'll need goto File which is under the Menu and then click on Site Manager in which we can click on new site then configure as illustrated above.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Then, we're asked to accept the SSL certificate, that can be done by click OK. After that, we are able to upload and download required files and folders from our FTP server.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, we have successfully installed and configured our Fedora 22 box with Proftpd FTP server. Proftpd is an awesome powerful highly configurable and extensible FTP daemon. The above tutorial illustrates us how we can configure a secure FTP server with TLS encryption. It is highly recommended to configure FTP server with TLS encryption as it enables SSL certificate security to the data transfer and login. Here, we haven't configured anonymous access to the FTP cause they are usually not recommended in a protected FTP system. An FTP access makes pretty easy for people to upload and download at good efficient performance. We can even change the ports for the users for additional security. So, if you have any questions, suggestions, feedback please write them in the comment box below so that we can improve or update our contents. Thank you ! Enjoy :-)
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://linoxide.com/linux-how-to/configure-ftp-proftpd-fedora-22/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Arun Pyasi][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://linoxide.com/author/arunp/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.proftpd.org/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.proftpd.org/features.html
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
|
||||
translation by strugglingyouth
|
||||
Setting Up ‘XR’ (Crossroads) Load Balancer for Web Servers on RHEL/CentOS
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
Crossroads is a service independent, open source load balance and fail-over utility for Linux and TCP based services. It can be used for HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, SMTP and DNS etc. It is also a multi-threaded utility which consumes only one memory space which leads to increase the performance when balancing load.
|
||||
|
||||
Let’s have a look at how XR works. We can locate XR between network clients and a nest of servers which dispatches client requests to the servers balancing the load.
|
||||
|
||||
If a server is down, XR forwards next client request to the next server in line, so client feels no down time. Have a look at the below diagram to understand what kind of a situation we are going to handle with XR.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Install XR Crossroads Load Balancer
|
||||
|
||||
There are two web-servers, one gateway server which we install and setup XR to receive client requests and distribute them among the servers.
|
||||
|
||||
XR Crossroads Gateway Server : 172.16.1.204
|
||||
Web Server 01 : 172.16.1.222
|
||||
Web Server 02 : 192.168.1.161
|
||||
|
||||
In above scenario, my gateway server (i.e XR Crossroads) bears the IP address 172.16.1.222, webserver01 is 172.16.1.222 and it listens through port 8888 and webserver02 is 192.168.1.161 and it listens through port 5555.
|
||||
|
||||
Now all I need is to balance the load of all the requests that receives by the XR gateway from internet and distribute them among two web-servers balancing the load.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step1: Install XR Crossroads Load Balancer on Gateway Server ###
|
||||
|
||||
**1. Unfortunately, there isn’t any binary RPM packages available for crosscroads, the only way to install XR crossroads from source tarball.**
|
||||
|
||||
To compile XR, you must have C++ compiler and Gnu make utilities installed on the system in order to continue installation error free.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum install gcc gcc-c++ make
|
||||
|
||||
Next, download the source tarball by going to their official site ([https://crossroads.e-tunity.com][1]), and grab the archived package (i.e. crossroads-stable.tar.gz).
|
||||
|
||||
Alternatively, you use following wget utility to download the package and extract it in any location (eg: /usr/src/), go to unpacked directory and issue “make install” command.
|
||||
|
||||
# wget https://crossroads.e-tunity.com/downloads/crossroads-stable.tar.gz
|
||||
# tar -xvf crossroads-stable.tar.gz
|
||||
# cd crossroads-2.74/
|
||||
# make install
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Install XR Crossroads Load Balancer
|
||||
|
||||
After installation finishes, the binary files are created under /usr/sbin/ and XR configuration within /etc namely “xrctl.xml”.
|
||||
|
||||
**2. As the last prerequisite, you need two web-servers. For ease of use, I have created two python SimpleHTTPServer instances in one server.**
|
||||
|
||||
To see how to setup a python SimpleHTTPServer, read our article at [Create Two Web Servers Easily Using SimpleHTTPServer][2].
|
||||
|
||||
As I said, we’re using two web-servers, and they are webserver01 running on 172.16.1.222 through port 8888 and webserver02 running on 192.168.1.161 through port 5555.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
XR WebServer 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
XR WebServer 02
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 2: Configure XR Crossroads Load Balancer ###
|
||||
|
||||
**3. All requisites are in place. Now what we have to do is configure the `xrctl.xml` file to distribute the load among the web-servers which receives by the XR server from the internet.**
|
||||
|
||||
Now open `xrctl.xml` file with [vi/vim editor][3].
|
||||
|
||||
# vim /etc/xrctl.xml
|
||||
|
||||
and make the changes as suggested below.
|
||||
|
||||
<?xml version=<94>1.0<94> encoding=<94>UTF-8<94>?>
|
||||
<configuration>
|
||||
<system>
|
||||
<uselogger>true</uselogger>
|
||||
<logdir>/tmp</logdir>
|
||||
</system>
|
||||
<service>
|
||||
<name>Tecmint</name>
|
||||
<server>
|
||||
<address>172.16.1.204:8080</address>
|
||||
<type>tcp</type>
|
||||
<webinterface>0:8010</webinterface>
|
||||
<verbose>yes</verbose>
|
||||
<clientreadtimeout>0</clientreadtimeout>
|
||||
<clientwritetimout>0</clientwritetimeout>
|
||||
<backendreadtimeout>0</backendreadtimeout>
|
||||
<backendwritetimeout>0</backendwritetimeout>
|
||||
</server>
|
||||
<backend>
|
||||
<address>172.16.1.222:8888</address>
|
||||
</backend>
|
||||
<backend>
|
||||
<address>192.168.1.161:5555</address>
|
||||
</backend>
|
||||
</service>
|
||||
</configuration>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Configure XR Crossroads Load Balancer
|
||||
|
||||
Here, you can see a very basic XR configuration done within xrctl.xml. I have defined what the XR server is, what are the back end servers and their ports and web interface port for the XR.
|
||||
|
||||
**4. Now you need to start the XR daemon by issuing below commands.**
|
||||
|
||||
# xrctl start
|
||||
# xrctl status
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Start XR Crossroads
|
||||
|
||||
**5. Okay great. Now it’s time to check whether the configs are working fine. Open two web browsers and enter the IP address of the XR server with port and see the output.**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Web Server Load Balancing
|
||||
|
||||
Fantastic. It works fine. now it’s time to play with XR.
|
||||
|
||||
**6. Now it’s time to login into XR Crossroads dashboard and see the port we’ve configured for web-interface. Enter your XR server’s IP address with the port number for web-interface you have configured in xrctl.xml.**
|
||||
|
||||
http://172.16.1.204:8010
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
XR Crossroads Dashboard
|
||||
|
||||
This is what it looks like. It’s easy to understand, user-friendly and easy to use. It shows how many connections each back end server received in the top right corner along with the additional details regarding the requests receiving. Even you can set the load weight each server you need to bear, maximum number of connections and load average etc..
|
||||
|
||||
The best part is, you actually can do this even without configuring xrctl.xml. Only thing you have to do is issue the command with following syntax and it will do the job done.
|
||||
|
||||
# xr --verbose --server tcp:172.16.1.204:8080 --backend 172.16.1.222:8888 --backend 192.168.1.161:5555
|
||||
|
||||
Explanation of above syntax in detail:
|
||||
|
||||
- –verbose will show what happens when the command has executed.
|
||||
- –server defines the XR server you have installed the package in.
|
||||
- –backend defines the webservers you need to balance the traffic to.
|
||||
- Tcp defines it uses tcp services.
|
||||
|
||||
For more details, about documentations and configuration of CROSSROADS, please visit their official site at: [https://crossroads.e-tunity.com/][4].
|
||||
|
||||
XR Corssroads enables many ways to enhance your server performance, protect downtime’s and make your admin tasks easier and handier. Hope you enjoyed the guide and feel free to comment below for the suggestions and clarifications. Keep in touch with Tecmint for handy How To’s.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/setting-up-xr-crossroads-load-balancer-for-web-servers-on-rhel-centos/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Thilina Uvindasiri][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/thilidhanushka/
|
||||
[1]:https://crossroads.e-tunity.com/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.tecmint.com/python-simplehttpserver-to-create-webserver-or-serve-files-instantly/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.tecmint.com/vi-editor-usage/
|
||||
[4]:https://crossroads.e-tunity.com/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Introduction to RAID, Concepts of RAID and RAID Levels – Part 1
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
RAID is a Redundant Array of Inexpensive disks, but nowadays it is called Redundant Array of Independent drives. Earlier it is used to be very costly to buy even a smaller size of disk, but nowadays we can buy a large size of disk with the same amount like before. Raid is just a collection of disks in a pool to become a logical volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Understanding RAID Setups in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
Raid contains groups or sets or Arrays. A combine of drivers make a group of disks to form a RAID Array or RAID set. It can be a minimum of 2 number of disk connected to a raid controller and make a logical volume or more drives can be in a group. Only one Raid level can be applied in a group of disks. Raid are used when we need excellent performance. According to our selected raid level, performance will differ. Saving our data by fault tolerance & high availability.
|
||||
|
||||
This series will be titled Preparation for the setting up RAID ‘s through Parts 1-9 and covers the following topics.
|
||||
|
||||
- Part 1: Introduction to RAID, Concepts of RAID and RAID Levels
|
||||
- Part 2: How to setup RAID0 (Stripe) in Linux
|
||||
- Part 3: How to setup RAID1 (Mirror) in Linux
|
||||
- Part 4: How to setup RAID5 (Striping with Distributed Parity) in Linux
|
||||
- Part 5: How to setup RAID6 (Striping with Double Distributed Parity) in Linux
|
||||
- Part 6: Setting Up RAID 10 or 1+0 (Nested) in Linux
|
||||
- Part 7: Growing an Existing RAID Array and Removing Failed Disks in Raid
|
||||
- Part 8: Recovering (Rebuilding) failed drives in RAID
|
||||
- Part 9: Managing RAID in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
This is the Part 1 of a 9-tutorial series, here we will cover the introduction of RAID, Concepts of RAID and RAID Levels that are required for the setting up RAID in Linux.
|
||||
|
||||
### Software RAID and Hardware RAID ###
|
||||
|
||||
Software RAID have low performance, because of consuming resource from hosts. Raid software need to load for read data from software raid volumes. Before loading raid software, OS need to get boot to load the raid software. No need of Physical hardware in software raids. Zero cost investment.
|
||||
|
||||
Hardware RAID have high performance. They are dedicated RAID Controller which is Physically built using PCI express cards. It won’t use the host resource. They have NVRAM for cache to read and write. Stores cache while rebuild even if there is power-failure, it will store the cache using battery power backups. Very costly investments needed for a large scale.
|
||||
|
||||
Hardware RAID Card will look like below:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hardware RAID
|
||||
|
||||
#### Featured Concepts of RAID ####
|
||||
|
||||
- Parity method in raid regenerate the lost content from parity saved information’s. RAID 5, RAID 6 Based on Parity.
|
||||
- Stripe is sharing data randomly to multiple disk. This won’t have full data in a single disk. If we use 3 disks half of our data will be in each disks.
|
||||
- Mirroring is used in RAID 1 and RAID 10. Mirroring is making a copy of same data. In RAID 1 it will save the same content to the other disk too.
|
||||
- Hot spare is just a spare drive in our server which can automatically replace the failed drives. If any one of the drive failed in our array this hot spare drive will be used and rebuild automatically.
|
||||
- Chunks are just a size of data which can be minimum from 4KB and more. By defining chunk size we can increase the I/O performance.
|
||||
|
||||
RAID’s are in various Levels. Here we will see only the RAID Levels which is used mostly in real environment.
|
||||
|
||||
- RAID0 = Striping
|
||||
- RAID1 = Mirroring
|
||||
- RAID5 = Single Disk Distributed Parity
|
||||
- RAID6 = Double Disk Distributed Parity
|
||||
- RAID10 = Combine of Mirror & Stripe. (Nested RAID)
|
||||
|
||||
RAID are managed using mdadm package in most of the Linux distributions. Let us get a Brief look into each RAID Levels.
|
||||
|
||||
#### RAID 0 (or) Striping ####
|
||||
|
||||
Striping have a excellent performance. In Raid 0 (Striping) the data will be written to disk using shared method. Half of the content will be in one disk and another half will be written to other disk.
|
||||
|
||||
Let us assume we have 2 Disk drives, for example, if we write data “TECMINT” to logical volume it will be saved as ‘T‘ will be saved in first disk and ‘E‘ will be saved in Second disk and ‘C‘ will be saved in First disk and again ‘M‘ will be saved in Second disk and it continues in round-robin process.
|
||||
|
||||
In this situation if any one of the drive fails we will loose our data, because with half of data from one of the disk can’t use to rebuilt the raid. But while comparing to Write Speed and performance RAID 0 is Excellent. We need at least minimum 2 disks to create a RAID 0 (Striping). If you need your valuable data don’t use this RAID LEVEL.
|
||||
|
||||
- High Performance.
|
||||
- There is Zero Capacity Loss in RAID 0
|
||||
- Zero Fault Tolerance.
|
||||
- Write and Reading will be good performance.
|
||||
|
||||
#### RAID 1 (or) Mirroring ####
|
||||
|
||||
Mirroring have a good performance. Mirroring can make a copy of same data what we have. Assuming we have two numbers of 2TB Hard drives, total there we have 4TB, but in mirroring while the drives are behind the RAID Controller to form a Logical drive Only we can see the 2TB of logical drive.
|
||||
|
||||
While we save any data, it will write to both 2TB Drives. Minimum two drives are needed to create a RAID 1 or Mirror. If a disk failure occurred we can reproduce the raid set by replacing a new disk. If any one of the disk fails in RAID 1, we can get the data from other one as there was a copy of same content in the other disk. So there is zero data loss.
|
||||
|
||||
- Good Performance.
|
||||
- Here Half of the Space will be lost in total capacity.
|
||||
- Full Fault Tolerance.
|
||||
- Rebuilt will be faster.
|
||||
- Writing Performance will be slow.
|
||||
- Reading will be good.
|
||||
- Can be used for operating systems and database for small scale.
|
||||
|
||||
#### RAID 5 (or) Distributed Parity ####
|
||||
|
||||
RAID 5 is mostly used in enterprise levels. RAID 5 work by distributed parity method. Parity info will be used to rebuild the data. It rebuilds from the information left on the remaining good drives. This will protect our data from drive failure.
|
||||
|
||||
Assume we have 4 drives, if one drive fails and while we replace the failed drive we can rebuild the replaced drive from parity informations. Parity information’s are Stored in all 4 drives, if we have 4 numbers of 1TB hard-drive. The parity information will be stored in 256GB in each drivers and other 768GB in each drives will be defined for Users. RAID 5 can be survive from a single Drive failure, If drives fails more than 1 will cause loss of data’s.
|
||||
|
||||
- Excellent Performance
|
||||
- Reading will be extremely very good in speed.
|
||||
- Writing will be Average, slow if we won’t use a Hardware RAID Controller.
|
||||
- Rebuild from Parity information from all drives.
|
||||
- Full Fault Tolerance.
|
||||
- 1 Disk Space will be under Parity.
|
||||
- Can be used in file servers, web servers, very important backups.
|
||||
|
||||
#### RAID 6 Two Parity Distributed Disk ####
|
||||
|
||||
RAID 6 is same as RAID 5 with two parity distributed system. Mostly used in a large number of arrays. We need minimum 4 Drives, even if there 2 Drive fails we can rebuild the data while replacing new drives.
|
||||
|
||||
Very slower than RAID 5, because it writes data to all 4 drivers at same time. Will be average in speed while we using a Hardware RAID Controller. If we have 6 numbers of 1TB hard-drives 4 drives will be used for data and 2 drives will be used for Parity.
|
||||
|
||||
- Poor Performance.
|
||||
- Read Performance will be good.
|
||||
- Write Performance will be Poor if we not using a Hardware RAID Controller.
|
||||
- Rebuild from 2 Parity Drives.
|
||||
- Full Fault tolerance.
|
||||
- 2 Disks space will be under Parity.
|
||||
- Can be Used in Large Arrays.
|
||||
- Can be use in backup purpose, video streaming, used in large scale.
|
||||
|
||||
#### RAID 10 (or) Mirror & Stripe ####
|
||||
|
||||
RAID 10 can be called as 1+0 or 0+1. This will do both works of Mirror & Striping. Mirror will be first and stripe will be the second in RAID 10. Stripe will be the first and mirror will be the second in RAID 01. RAID 10 is better comparing to 01.
|
||||
|
||||
Assume, we have 4 Number of drives. While I’m writing some data to my logical volume it will be saved under All 4 drives using mirror and stripe methods.
|
||||
|
||||
If I’m writing a data “TECMINT” in RAID 10 it will save the data as follow. First “T” will write to both disks and second “E” will write to both disk, this step will be used for all data write. It will make a copy of every data to other disk too.
|
||||
|
||||
Same time it will use the RAID 0 method and write data as follow “T” will write to first disk and “E” will write to second disk. Again “C” will write to first Disk and “M” to second disk.
|
||||
|
||||
- Good read and write performance.
|
||||
- Here Half of the Space will be lost in total capacity.
|
||||
- Fault Tolerance.
|
||||
- Fast rebuild from copying data.
|
||||
- Can be used in Database storage for high performance and availability.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
In this article we have seen what is RAID and which levels are mostly used in RAID in real environment. Hope you have learned the write-up about RAID. For RAID setup one must know about the basic Knowledge about RAID. The above content will fulfil basic understanding about RAID.
|
||||
|
||||
In the next upcoming articles I’m going to cover how to setup and create a RAID using Various Levels, Growing a RAID Group (Array) and Troubleshooting with failed Drives and much more.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Creating Software RAID0 (Stripe) on ‘Two Devices’ Using ‘mdadm’ Tool in Linux – Part 2
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
RAID is Redundant Array of Inexpensive disks, used for high availability and reliability in large scale environments, where data need to be protected than normal use. Raid is just a collection of disks in a pool to become a logical volume and contains an array. A combine drivers makes an array or called as set of (group).
|
||||
|
||||
RAID can be created, if there are minimum 2 number of disk connected to a raid controller and make a logical volume or more drives can be added in an array according to defined RAID Levels. Software Raid are available without using Physical hardware those are called as software raid. Software Raid will be named as Poor man raid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Setup RAID0 in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
Main concept of using RAID is to save data from Single point of failure, means if we using a single disk to store the data and if it’s failed, then there is no chance of getting our data back, to stop the data loss we need a fault tolerance method. So, that we can use some collection of disk to form a RAID set.
|
||||
|
||||
#### What is Stripe in RAID 0? ####
|
||||
|
||||
Stripe is striping data across multiple disk at the same time by dividing the contents. Assume we have two disks and if we save content to logical volume it will be saved under both two physical disks by dividing the content. For better performance RAID 0 will be used, but we can’t get the data if one of the drive fails. So, it isn’t a good practice to use RAID 0. The only solution is to install operating system with RAID0 applied logical volumes to safe your important files.
|
||||
|
||||
- RAID 0 has High Performance.
|
||||
- Zero Capacity Loss in RAID 0. No Space will be wasted.
|
||||
- Zero Fault Tolerance ( Can’t get back the data if any one of disk fails).
|
||||
- Write and Reading will be Excellent.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Requirements ####
|
||||
|
||||
Minimum number of disks are allowed to create RAID 0 is 2, but you can add more disk but the order should be twice as 2, 4, 6, 8. If you have a Physical RAID card with enough ports, you can add more disks.
|
||||
|
||||
Here we are not using a Hardware raid, this setup depends only on Software RAID. If we have a physical hardware raid card we can access it from it’s utility UI. Some motherboard by default in-build with RAID feature, there UI can be accessed using Ctrl+I keys.
|
||||
|
||||
If you’re new to RAID setups, please read our earlier article, where we’ve covered some basic introduction of about RAID.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Introduction to RAID and RAID Concepts][1]
|
||||
|
||||
**My Server Setup**
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.225
|
||||
Two Disks : 20 GB each
|
||||
|
||||
This article is Part 2 of a 9-tutorial RAID series, here in this part, we are going to see how we can create and setup Software RAID0 or striping in Linux systems or servers using two 20GB disks named sdb and sdc.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 1: Updating System and Installing mdadm for Managing RAID ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. Before setting up RAID0 in Linux, let’s do a system update and then install ‘mdadm‘ package. The mdadm is a small program, which will allow us to configure and manage RAID devices in Linux.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum clean all && yum update
|
||||
# yum install mdadm -y
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Install mdadm Tool
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 2: Verify Attached Two 20GB Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
2. Before creating RAID 0, make sure to verify that the attached two hard drives are detected or not, using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Hard Drives
|
||||
|
||||
3. Once the new hard drives detected, it’s time to check whether the attached drives are already using any existing raid with the help of following ‘mdadm’ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-c]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check RAID Devices
|
||||
|
||||
In the above output, we come to know that none of the RAID have been applied to these two sdb and sdc drives.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 3: Creating Partitions for RAID ###
|
||||
|
||||
4. Now create sdb and sdc partitions for raid, with the help of following fdisk command. Here, I will show how to create partition on sdb drive.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
|
||||
Follow below instructions for creating partitions.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition.
|
||||
- Next select the partition number as 1.
|
||||
- Give the default value by just pressing two times Enter key.
|
||||
- Next press ‘P‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create Partitions
|
||||
|
||||
Follow below instructions for creating Linux raid auto on partitions.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘L‘ to list all available types.
|
||||
- Type ‘t‘to choose the partitions.
|
||||
- Choose ‘fd‘ for Linux raid auto and press Enter to apply.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘P‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create RAID Partitions in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: Please follow same above instructions to create partition on sdc drive now.
|
||||
|
||||
5. After creating partitions, verify both the drivers are correctly defined for RAID using following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-c]
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify RAID Partitions
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 4: Creating RAID md Devices ###
|
||||
|
||||
6. Now create md device (i.e. /dev/md0) and apply raid level using below command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -C /dev/md0 -l raid0 -n 2 /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=stripe --raid-devices=2 /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
|
||||
- -C – create
|
||||
- -l – level
|
||||
- -n – No of raid-devices
|
||||
|
||||
7. Once md device has been created, now verify the status of RAID Level, Devices and Array used, with the help of following series of commands as shown.
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify RAID Level
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify RAID Device
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify RAID Array
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 5: Assiging RAID Devices to Filesystem ###
|
||||
|
||||
8. Create a ext4 filesystem for a RAID device /dev/md0 and mount it under /dev/raid0.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkfs.ext4 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create ext4 Filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
9. Once ext4 filesystem has been created for Raid device, now create a mount point directory (i.e. /mnt/raid0) and mount the device /dev/md0 under it.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /mnt/raid0
|
||||
# mount /dev/md0 /mnt/raid0/
|
||||
|
||||
10. Next, verify that the device /dev/md0 is mounted under /mnt/raid0 directory using df command.
|
||||
|
||||
# df -h
|
||||
|
||||
11. Next, create a file called ‘tecmint.txt‘ under the mount point /mnt/raid0, add some content to the created file and view the content of a file and directory.
|
||||
|
||||
# touch /mnt/raid0/tecmint.txt
|
||||
# echo "Hi everyone how you doing ?" > /mnt/raid0/tecmint.txt
|
||||
# cat /mnt/raid0/tecmint.txt
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid0/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Mount Device
|
||||
|
||||
12. Once you’ve verified mount points, it’s time to create an fstab entry in /etc/fstab file.
|
||||
|
||||
# vim /etc/fstab
|
||||
|
||||
Add the following entry as described. May vary according to your mount location and filesystem you using.
|
||||
|
||||
/dev/md0 /mnt/raid0 ext4 deaults 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Add Device to Fstab
|
||||
|
||||
13. Run mount ‘-a‘ to check if there is any error in fstab entry.
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -av
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Errors in Fstab
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 6: Saving RAID Configurations ###
|
||||
|
||||
14. Finally, save the raid configuration to one of the file to keep the configurations for future use. Again we use ‘mdadm’ command with ‘-s‘ (scan) and ‘-v‘ (verbose) options as shown.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E -s -v >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
# cat /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Save RAID Configurations
|
||||
|
||||
That’s it, we have seen here, how to configure RAID0 striping with raid levels by using two hard disks. In next article, we will see how to setup RAID5.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid0-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Setting up RAID 1 (Mirroring) using ‘Two Disks’ in Linux – Part 3
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
RAID Mirroring means an exact clone (or mirror) of the same data writing to two drives. A minimum two number of disks are more required in an array to create RAID1 and it’s useful only, when read performance or reliability is more precise than the data storage capacity.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Setup Raid1 in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
Mirrors are created to protect against data loss due to disk failure. Each disk in a mirror involves an exact copy of the data. When one disk fails, the same data can be retrieved from other functioning disk. However, the failed drive can be replaced from the running computer without any user interruption.
|
||||
|
||||
### Features of RAID 1 ###
|
||||
|
||||
- Mirror has Good Performance.
|
||||
- 50% of space will be lost. Means if we have two disk with 500GB size total, it will be 1TB but in Mirroring it will only show us 500GB.
|
||||
- No data loss in Mirroring if one disk fails, because we have the same content in both disks.
|
||||
- Reading will be good than writing data to drive.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Requirements ####
|
||||
|
||||
Minimum Two number of disks are allowed to create RAID 1, but you can add more disks by using twice as 2, 4, 6, 8. To add more disks, your system must have a RAID physical adapter (hardware card).
|
||||
|
||||
Here we’re using software raid not a Hardware raid, if your system has an inbuilt physical hardware raid card you can access it from it’s utility UI or using Ctrl+I key.
|
||||
|
||||
Read Also: [Basic Concepts of RAID in Linux][1]
|
||||
|
||||
#### My Server Setup ####
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.226
|
||||
Hostname : rd1.tecmintlocal.com
|
||||
Disk 1 [20GB] : /dev/sdb
|
||||
Disk 2 [20GB] : /dev/sdc
|
||||
|
||||
This article will guide you through a step-by-step instructions on how to setup a software RAID 1 or Mirror using mdadm (creates and manages raid) on Linux Platform. Although the same instructions also works on other Linux distributions such as RedHat, CentOS, Fedora, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 1: Installing Prerequisites and Examine Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. As I said above, we’re using mdadm utility for creating and managing RAID in Linux. So, let’s install the mdadm software package on Linux using yum or apt-get package manager tool.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum install mdadm [on RedHat systems]
|
||||
# apt-get install mdadm [on Debain systems]
|
||||
|
||||
2. Once ‘mdadm‘ package has been installed, we need to examine our disk drives whether there is already any raid configured using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-c]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check RAID on Disks
|
||||
|
||||
As you see from the above screen, that there is no any super-block detected yet, means no RAID defined.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 2: Drive Partitioning for RAID ###
|
||||
|
||||
3. As I mentioned above, that we’re using minimum two partitions /dev/sdb and /dev/sdc for creating RAID1. Let’s create partitions on these two drives using ‘fdisk‘ command and change the type to raid during partition creation.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
|
||||
Follow the below instructions
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition.
|
||||
- Next select the partition number as 1.
|
||||
- Give the default full size by just pressing two times Enter key.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
- Press ‘L‘ to list all available types.
|
||||
- Type ‘t‘to choose the partitions.
|
||||
- Choose ‘fd‘ for Linux raid auto and press Enter to apply.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘p‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create Disk Partitions
|
||||
|
||||
After ‘/dev/sdb‘ partition has been created, next follow the same instructions to create new partition on /dev/sdc drive.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create Second Partitions
|
||||
|
||||
4. Once both the partitions are created successfully, verify the changes on both sdb & sdc drive using the same ‘mdadm‘ command and also confirm the RAID type as shown in the following screen grabs.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-c]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Partitions Changes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check RAID Type
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: As you see in the above picture, there is no any defined RAID on the sdb1 and sdc1 drives so far, that’s the reason we are getting as no super-blocks detected.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 3: Creating RAID1 Devices ###
|
||||
|
||||
5. Next create RAID1 Device called ‘/dev/md0‘ using the following command and verity it.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=mirror --raid-devices=2 /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create RAID Device
|
||||
|
||||
6. Next check the raid devices type and raid array using following commands.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check RAID Device type
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check RAID Device Array
|
||||
|
||||
From the above pictures, one can easily understand that raid1 have been created and using /dev/sdb1 and /dev/sdc1 partitions and also you can see the status as resyncing.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 4: Creating File System on RAID Device ###
|
||||
|
||||
7. Create file system using ext4 for md0 and mount under /mnt/raid1.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkfs.ext4 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create RAID Device Filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
8. Next, mount the newly created filesystem under ‘/mnt/raid1‘ and create some files and verify the contents under mount point.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /mnt/raid1
|
||||
# mount /dev/md0 /mnt/raid1/
|
||||
# touch /mnt/raid1/tecmint.txt
|
||||
# echo "tecmint raid setups" > /mnt/raid1/tecmint.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Mount Raid Device
|
||||
|
||||
9. To auto-mount RAID1 on system reboot, you need to make an entry in fstab file. Open ‘/etc/fstab‘ file and add the following line at the bottom of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
/dev/md0 /mnt/raid1 ext4 defaults 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Raid Automount Device
|
||||
|
||||
10. Run ‘mount -a‘ to check whether there are any errors in fstab entry.
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -av
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Errors in fstab
|
||||
|
||||
11. Next, save the raid configuration manually to ‘mdadm.conf‘ file using the below command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Save Raid Configuration
|
||||
|
||||
The above configuration file is read by the system at the reboots and load the RAID devices.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 5: Verify Data After Disk Failure ###
|
||||
|
||||
12. Our main purpose is, even after any of hard disk fail or crash our data needs to be available. Let’s see what will happen when any of disk disk is unavailable in array.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Raid Device Verify
|
||||
|
||||
In the above image, we can see there are 2 devices available in our RAID and Active Devices are 2. Now let us see what will happen when a disk plugged out (removed sdc disk) or fails.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev | grep sd
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Test RAID Devices
|
||||
|
||||
Now in the above image, you can see that one of our drive is lost. I unplugged one of the drive from my Virtual machine. Now let us check our precious data.
|
||||
|
||||
# cd /mnt/raid1/
|
||||
# cat tecmint.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify RAID Data
|
||||
|
||||
Did you see our data is still available. From this we come to know the advantage of RAID 1 (mirror). In next article, we will see how to setup a RAID 5 striping with distributed Parity. Hope this helps you to understand how the RAID 1 (Mirror) Works.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid1-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Creating RAID 5 (Striping with Distributed Parity) in Linux – Part 4
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
In RAID 5, data strips across multiple drives with distributed parity. The striping with distributed parity means it will split the parity information and stripe data over the multiple disks, which will have good data redundancy.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Setup Raid 5 in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
For RAID Level it should have at least three hard drives or more. RAID 5 are being used in the large scale production environment where it’s cost effective and provide performance as well as redundancy.
|
||||
|
||||
#### What is Parity? ####
|
||||
|
||||
Parity is a simplest common method of detecting errors in data storage. Parity stores information in each disks, Let’s say we have 4 disks, in 4 disks one disk space will be split to all disks to store the parity information’s. If any one of the disks fails still we can get the data by rebuilding from parity information after replacing the failed disk.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Pros and Cons of RAID 5 ####
|
||||
|
||||
- Gives better performance
|
||||
- Support Redundancy and Fault tolerance.
|
||||
- Support hot spare options.
|
||||
- Will loose a single disk capacity for using parity information.
|
||||
- No data loss if a single disk fails. We can rebuilt from parity after replacing the failed disk.
|
||||
- Suits for transaction oriented environment as the reading will be faster.
|
||||
- Due to parity overhead, writing will be slow.
|
||||
- Rebuild takes long time.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Requirements ####
|
||||
|
||||
Minimum 3 hard drives are required to create Raid 5, but you can add more disks, only if you’ve a dedicated hardware raid controller with multi ports. Here, we are using software RAID and ‘mdadm‘ package to create raid.
|
||||
|
||||
mdadm is a package which allow us to configure and manage RAID devices in Linux. By default there is no configuration file is available for RAID, we must save the configuration file after creating and configuring RAID setup in separate file called mdadm.conf.
|
||||
|
||||
Before moving further, I suggest you to go through the following articles for understanding the basics of RAID in Linux.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Basic Concepts of RAID in Linux – Part 1][1]
|
||||
- [Creating RAID 0 (Stripe) in Linux – Part 2][2]
|
||||
- [Setting up RAID 1 (Mirroring) in Linux – Part 3][3]
|
||||
|
||||
#### My Server Setup ####
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.227
|
||||
Hostname : rd5.tecmintlocal.com
|
||||
Disk 1 [20GB] : /dev/sdb
|
||||
Disk 2 [20GB] : /dev/sdc
|
||||
Disk 3 [20GB] : /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
This article is a Part 4 of a 9-tutorial RAID series, here we are going to setup a software RAID 5 with distributed parity in Linux systems or servers using three 20GB disks named /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and /dev/sdd.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 1: Installing mdadm and Verify Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. As we said earlier, that we’re using CentOS 6.5 Final release for this raid setup, but same steps can be followed for RAID setup in any Linux based distributions.
|
||||
|
||||
# lsb_release -a
|
||||
# ifconfig | grep inet
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CentOS 6.5 Summary
|
||||
|
||||
2. If you’re following our raid series, we assume that you’ve already installed ‘mdadm‘ package, if not, use the following command according to your Linux distribution to install the package.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum install mdadm [on RedHat systems]
|
||||
# apt-get install mdadm [on Debain systems]
|
||||
|
||||
3. After the ‘mdadm‘ package installation, let’s list the three 20GB disks which we have added in our system using ‘fdisk‘ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk -l | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Install mdadm Tool
|
||||
|
||||
4. Now it’s time to examine the attached three drives for any existing RAID blocks on these drives using following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-d]
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Examine Drives For Raid
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: From the above image illustrated that there is no any super-block detected yet. So, there is no RAID defined in all three drives. Let us start to create one now.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 2: Partitioning the Disks for RAID ###
|
||||
|
||||
5. First and foremost, we have to partition the disks (/dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and /dev/sdd) before adding to a RAID, So let us define the partition using ‘fdisk’ command, before forwarding to the next steps.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
#### Create /dev/sdb Partition ####
|
||||
|
||||
Please follow the below instructions to create partition on /dev/sdb drive.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition. Here we are choosing Primary because there is no partitions defined yet.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘1‘ to be the first partition. By default it will be 1.
|
||||
- Here for cylinder size we don’t have to choose the specified size because we need the whole partition for RAID so just Press Enter two times to choose the default full size.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the created partition.
|
||||
- Change the Type, If we need to know the every available types Press ‘L‘.
|
||||
- Here, we are selecting ‘fd‘ as my type is RAID.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘p‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create sdb Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: We have to follow the steps mentioned above to create partitions for sdc & sdd drives too.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Create /dev/sdc Partition ####
|
||||
|
||||
Now partition the sdc and sdd drives by following the steps given in the screenshot or you can follow above steps.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create sdc Partition
|
||||
|
||||
#### Create /dev/sdd Partition ####
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create sdd Partition
|
||||
|
||||
6. After creating partitions, check for changes in all three drives sdb, sdc, & sdd.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-c]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Partition Changes
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: In the above pic. depict the type is fd i.e. for RAID.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Now Check for the RAID blocks in newly created partitions. If no super-blocks detected, than we can move forward to create a new RAID 5 setup on these drives.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid on Partition
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 3: Creating md device md0 ###
|
||||
|
||||
8. Now create a Raid device ‘md0‘ (i.e. /dev/md0) and include raid level on all newly created partitions (sdb1, sdc1 and sdd1) using below command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=5 --raid-devices=3 /dev/sdb1 /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdd1
|
||||
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -C /dev/md0 -l=5 -n=3 /dev/sd[b-d]1
|
||||
|
||||
9. After creating raid device, check and verify the RAID, devices included and RAID Level from the mdstat output.
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid Device
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to monitor the current building process, you can use ‘watch‘ command, just pass through the ‘cat /proc/mdstat‘ with watch command which will refresh screen every 1 second.
|
||||
|
||||
# watch -n1 cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Monitor Raid 5 Process
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Raid 5 Process Summary
|
||||
|
||||
10. After creation of raid, Verify the raid devices using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-d]1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid Level
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: The Output of the above command will be little long as it prints the information of all three drives.
|
||||
|
||||
11. Next, verify the RAID array to assume that the devices which we’ve included in the RAID level are running and started to re-sync.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 4: Creating file system for md0 ###
|
||||
|
||||
12. Create a file system for ‘md0‘ device using ext4 before mounting.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkfs.ext4 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create md0 Filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
13. Now create a directory under ‘/mnt‘ then mount the created filesystem under /mnt/raid5 and check the files under mount point, you will see lost+found directory.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /mnt/raid5
|
||||
# mount /dev/md0 /mnt/raid5/
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid5/
|
||||
|
||||
14. Create few files under mount point /mnt/raid5 and append some text in any one of the file to verify the content.
|
||||
|
||||
# touch /mnt/raid5/raid5_tecmint_{1..5}
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid5/
|
||||
# echo "tecmint raid setups" > /mnt/raid5/raid5_tecmint_1
|
||||
# cat /mnt/raid5/raid5_tecmint_1
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Mount Raid Device
|
||||
|
||||
15. We need to add entry in fstab, else will not display our mount point after system reboot. To add an entry, we should edit the fstab file and append the following line as shown below. The mount point will differ according to your environment.
|
||||
|
||||
# vim /etc/fstab
|
||||
|
||||
/dev/md0 /mnt/raid5 ext4 defaults 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Raid 5 Automount
|
||||
|
||||
16. Next, run ‘mount -av‘ command to check whether any errors in fstab entry.
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -av
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Fstab Errors
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 5: Save Raid 5 Configuration ###
|
||||
|
||||
17. As mentioned earlier in requirement section, by default RAID don’t have a config file. We have to save it manually. If this step is not followed RAID device will not be in md0, it will be in some other random number.
|
||||
|
||||
So, we must have to save the configuration before system reboot. If the configuration is saved it will be loaded to the kernel during the system reboot and RAID will also gets loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Save Raid 5 Configuration
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Saving the configuration will keep the RAID level stable in md0 device.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 6: Adding Spare Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
18. What the use of adding a spare drive? its very useful if we have a spare drive, if any one of the disk fails in our array, this spare drive will get active and rebuild the process and sync the data from other disk, so we can see a redundancy here.
|
||||
|
||||
For more instructions on how to add spare drive and check Raid 5 fault tolerance, read #Step 6 and #Step 7 in the following article.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Add Spare Drive to Raid 5 Setup][4]
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
Here, in this article, we have seen how to setup a RAID 5 using three number of disks. Later in my upcoming articles, we will see how to troubleshoot when a disk fails in RAID 5 and how to replace for recovery.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid-5-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid0-in-linux/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid1-in-linux/
|
||||
[4]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid-6-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,321 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Setup RAID Level 6 (Striping with Double Distributed Parity) in Linux – Part 5
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
RAID 6 is upgraded version of RAID 5, where it has two distributed parity which provides fault tolerance even after two drives fails. Mission critical system still operational incase of two concurrent disks failures. It’s alike RAID 5, but provides more robust, because it uses one more disk for parity.
|
||||
|
||||
In our earlier article, we’ve seen distributed parity in RAID 5, but in this article we will going to see RAID 6 with double distributed parity. Don’t expect extra performance than any other RAID, if so we have to install a dedicated RAID Controller too. Here in RAID 6 even if we loose our 2 disks we can get the data back by replacing a spare drive and build it from parity.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Setup RAID 6 in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
To setup a RAID 6, minimum 4 numbers of disks or more in a set are required. RAID 6 have multiple disks even in some set it may be have some bunch of disks, while reading, it will read from all the drives, so reading would be faster whereas writing would be poor because it has to stripe over multiple disks.
|
||||
|
||||
Now, many of us comes to conclusion, why we need to use RAID 6, when it doesn’t perform like any other RAID. Hmm… those who raise this question need to know that, if they need high fault tolerance choose RAID 6. In every higher environments with high availability for database, they use RAID 6 because database is the most important and need to be safe in any cost, also it can be useful for video streaming environments.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Pros and Cons of RAID 6 ####
|
||||
|
||||
- Performance are good.
|
||||
- RAID 6 is expensive, as it requires two independent drives are used for parity functions.
|
||||
- Will loose a two disks capacity for using parity information (double parity).
|
||||
- No data loss, even after two disk fails. We can rebuilt from parity after replacing the failed disk.
|
||||
- Reading will be better than RAID 5, because it reads from multiple disk, But writing performance will be very poor without dedicated RAID Controller.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Requirements ####
|
||||
|
||||
Minimum 4 numbers of disks are required to create a RAID 6. If you want to add more disks, you can, but you must have dedicated raid controller. In software RAID, we will won’t get better performance in RAID 6. So we need a physical RAID controller.
|
||||
|
||||
Those who are new to RAID setup, we recommend to go through RAID articles below.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Basic Concepts of RAID in Linux – Part 1][1]
|
||||
- [Creating Software RAID 0 (Stripe) in Linux – Part 2][2]
|
||||
- [Setting up RAID 1 (Mirroring) in Linux – Part 3][3]
|
||||
|
||||
#### My Server Setup ####
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.228
|
||||
Hostname : rd6.tecmintlocal.com
|
||||
Disk 1 [20GB] : /dev/sdb
|
||||
Disk 2 [20GB] : /dev/sdc
|
||||
Disk 3 [20GB] : /dev/sdd
|
||||
Disk 4 [20GB] : /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
This article is a Part 5 of a 9-tutorial RAID series, here we are going to see how we can create and setup Software RAID 6 or Striping with Double Distributed Parity in Linux systems or servers using four 20GB disks named /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd and /dev/sde.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 1: Installing mdadm Tool and Examine Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. If you’re following our last two Raid articles (Part 2 and Part 3), where we’ve already shown how to install ‘mdadm‘ tool. If you’re new to this article, let me explain that ‘mdadm‘ is a tool to create and manage Raid in Linux systems, let’s install the tool using following command according to your Linux distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum install mdadm [on RedHat systems]
|
||||
# apt-get install mdadm [on Debain systems]
|
||||
|
||||
2. After installing the tool, now it’s time to verify the attached four drives that we are going to use for raid creation using the following ‘fdisk‘ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk -l | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Disks in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
3. Before creating a RAID drives, always examine our disk drives whether there is any RAID is already created on the disks.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid on Disk
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: In the above image depicts that there is no any super-block detected or no RAID is defined in four disk drives. We may move further to start creating RAID 6.
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 2: Drive Partitioning for RAID 6 ###
|
||||
|
||||
4. Now create partitions for raid on ‘/dev/sdb‘, ‘/dev/sdc‘, ‘/dev/sdd‘ and ‘/dev/sde‘ with the help of following fdisk command. Here, we will show how to create partition on sdb drive and later same steps to be followed for rest of the drives.
|
||||
|
||||
**Create /dev/sdb Partition**
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
|
||||
Please follow the instructions as shown below for creating partition.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition.
|
||||
- Next choose the partition number as 1.
|
||||
- Define the default value by just pressing two times Enter key.
|
||||
- Next press ‘P‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
- Press ‘L‘ to list all available types.
|
||||
- Type ‘t‘ to choose the partitions.
|
||||
- Choose ‘fd‘ for Linux raid auto and press Enter to apply.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘P‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create /dev/sdb Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Create /dev/sdb Partition**
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create /dev/sdc Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Create /dev/sdd Partition**
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create /dev/sdd Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Create /dev/sde Partition**
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create /dev/sde Partition
|
||||
|
||||
5. After creating partitions, it’s always good habit to examine the drives for super-blocks. If super-blocks does not exist than we can go head to create a new RAID setup.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb1 /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdd1 /dev/sde1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid on New Partitions
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 3: Creating md device (RAID) ###
|
||||
|
||||
6. Now it’s time to create Raid device ‘md0‘ (i.e. /dev/md0) and apply raid level on all newly created partitions and confirm the raid using following commands.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=6 --raid-devices=4 /dev/sdb1 /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdd1 /dev/sde1
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create Raid 6 Device
|
||||
|
||||
7. You can also check the current process of raid using watch command as shown in the screen grab below.
|
||||
|
||||
# watch -n1 cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid 6 Process
|
||||
|
||||
8. Verify the raid devices using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**:: The above command will be display the information of the four disks, which is quite long so not possible to post the output or screen grab here.
|
||||
|
||||
9. Next, verify the RAID array to confirm that the re-syncing is started.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid 6 Array
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 4: Creating FileSystem on Raid Device ###
|
||||
|
||||
10. Create a filesystem using ext4 for ‘/dev/md0‘ and mount it under /mnt/raid5. Here we’ve used ext4, but you can use any type of filesystem as per your choice.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkfs.ext4 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create File System on Raid 6
|
||||
|
||||
11. Mount the created filesystem under /mnt/raid6 and verify the files under mount point, we can see lost+found directory.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /mnt/raid6
|
||||
# mount /dev/md0 /mnt/raid6/
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid6/
|
||||
|
||||
12. Create some files under mount point and append some text in any one of the file to verify the content.
|
||||
|
||||
# touch /mnt/raid6/raid6_test.txt
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid6/
|
||||
# echo "tecmint raid setups" > /mnt/raid6/raid6_test.txt
|
||||
# cat /mnt/raid6/raid6_test.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid Content
|
||||
|
||||
13. Add an entry in /etc/fstab to auto mount the device at the system startup and append the below entry, mount point may differ according to your environment.
|
||||
|
||||
# vim /etc/fstab
|
||||
|
||||
/dev/md0 /mnt/raid6 ext4 defaults 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Automount Raid 6 Device
|
||||
|
||||
14. Next, execute ‘mount -a‘ command to verify whether there is any error in fstab entry.
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -av
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid Automount
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 5: Save RAID 6 Configuration ###
|
||||
|
||||
15. Please note by default RAID don’t have a config file. We have to save it by manually using below command and then verify the status of device ‘/dev/md0‘.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Save Raid 6 Configuration
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid 6 Status
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 6: Adding a Spare Drives ###
|
||||
|
||||
16. Now it has 4 disks and there are two parity information’s available. In some cases, if any one of the disk fails we can get the data, because there is double parity in RAID 6.
|
||||
|
||||
May be if the second disk fails, we can add a new one before loosing third disk. It is possible to add a spare drive while creating our RAID set, But I have not defined the spare drive while creating our raid set. But, we can add a spare drive after any drive failure or while creating the RAID set. Now we have already created the RAID set now let me add a spare drive for demonstration.
|
||||
|
||||
For the demonstration purpose, I’ve hot-plugged a new HDD disk (i.e. /dev/sdf), let’s verify the attached disk.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev/ | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check New Disk
|
||||
|
||||
17. Now again confirm the new attached disk for any raid is already configured or not using the same mdadm command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid on New Disk
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: As usual, like we’ve created partitions for four disks earlier, similarly we’ve to create new partition on the new plugged disk using fdisk command.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create /dev/sdf Partition
|
||||
|
||||
18. Again after creating new partition on /dev/sdf, confirm the raid on the partition, include the spare drive to the /dev/md0 raid device and verify the added device.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdf
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdf1
|
||||
# mdadm --add /dev/md0 /dev/sdf1
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify Raid on sdf Partition
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Add sdf Partition to Raid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify sdf Partition Details
|
||||
|
||||
### Step 7: Check Raid 6 Fault Tolerance ###
|
||||
|
||||
19. Now, let us check whether spare drive works automatically, if anyone of the disk fails in our Array. For testing, I’ve personally marked one of the drive is failed.
|
||||
|
||||
Here, we’re going to mark /dev/sdd1 as failed drive.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --manage --fail /dev/md0 /dev/sdd1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid 6 Fault Tolerance
|
||||
|
||||
20. Let me get the details of RAID set now and check whether our spare started to sync.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Auto Raid Syncing
|
||||
|
||||
**Hurray!** Here, we can see the spare got activated and started rebuilding process. At the bottom we can see the faulty drive /dev/sdd1 listed as faulty. We can monitor build process using following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Raid 6 Auto Syncing
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion: ###
|
||||
|
||||
Here, we have seen how to setup RAID 6 using four disks. This RAID level is one of the expensive setup with high redundancy. We will see how to setup a Nested RAID 10 and much more in the next articles. Till then, stay connected with TECMINT.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid-6-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid0-in-linux/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid1-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Setting Up RAID 10 or 1+0 (Nested) in Linux – Part 6
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
RAID 10 is a combine of RAID 0 and RAID 1 to form a RAID 10. To setup Raid 10, we need at least 4 number of disks. In our earlier articles, we’ve seen how to setup a RAID 0 and RAID 1 with minimum 2 number of disks.
|
||||
|
||||
Here we will use both RAID 0 and RAID 1 to perform a Raid 10 setup with minimum of 4 drives. Assume, that we’ve some data saved to logical volume, which is created with RAID 10. Just for an example, if we are saving a data “apple” this will be saved under all 4 disk by this following method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create Raid 10 in Linux
|
||||
|
||||
Using RAID 0 it will save as “A” in first disk and “p” in the second disk, then again “p” in first disk and “l” in second disk. Then “e” in first disk, like this it will continue the Round robin process to save the data. From this we come to know that RAID 0 will write the half of the data to first disk and other half of the data to second disk.
|
||||
|
||||
In RAID 1 method, same data will be written to other 2 disks as follows. “A” will write to both first and second disks, “P” will write to both disk, Again other “P” will write to both the disks. Thus using RAID 1 it will write to both the disks. This will continue in round robin process.
|
||||
|
||||
Now you all came to know that how RAID 10 works by combining of both RAID 0 and RAID 1. If we have 4 number of 20 GB size disks, it will be 80 GB in total, but we will get only 40 GB of Storage capacity, the half of total capacity will be lost for building RAID 10.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Pros and Cons of RAID 5 ####
|
||||
|
||||
- Gives better performance.
|
||||
- We will loose two of the disk capacity in RAID 10.
|
||||
- Reading and writing will be very good, because it will write and read to all those 4 disk at the same time.
|
||||
- It can be used for Database solutions, which needs a high I/O disk writes.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Requirements ####
|
||||
|
||||
In RAID 10, we need minimum of 4 disks, the first 2 disks for RAID 0 and other 2 Disks for RAID 1. Like I said before, RAID 10 is just a Combine of RAID 0 & 1. If we need to extended the RAID group, we must increase the disk by minimum 4 disks.
|
||||
|
||||
**My Server Setup**
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.229
|
||||
Hostname : rd10.tecmintlocal.com
|
||||
Disk 1 [20GB] : /dev/sdd
|
||||
Disk 2 [20GB] : /dev/sdc
|
||||
Disk 3 [20GB] : /dev/sdd
|
||||
Disk 4 [20GB] : /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
There are two ways to setup RAID 10, but here I’m going to show you both methods, but I prefer you to follow the first method, which makes the work lot easier for setting up a RAID 10.
|
||||
|
||||
### Method 1: Setting Up Raid 10 ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. First, verify that all the 4 added disks are detected or not using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
2. Once the four disks are detected, it’s time to check for the drives whether there is already any raid existed before creating a new one.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Verify 4 Added Disks
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: In the above output, you see there isn’t any super-block detected yet, that means there is no RAID defined in all 4 drives.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 1: Drive Partitioning for RAID ####
|
||||
|
||||
3. Now create a new partition on all 4 disks (/dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd and /dev/sde) using the ‘fdisk’ tool.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
**Create /dev/sdb Partition**
|
||||
|
||||
Let me show you how to partition one of the disk (/dev/sdb) using fdisk, this steps will be the same for all the other disks too.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
|
||||
Please use the below steps for creating a new partition on /dev/sdb drive.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘1‘ to be the first partition.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the created partition.
|
||||
- Change the Type, If we need to know the every available types Press ‘L‘.
|
||||
- Here, we are selecting ‘fd‘ as my type is RAID.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘p‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Disk sdb Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: Please use the above same instructions for creating partitions on other disks (sdc, sdd sdd sde).
|
||||
|
||||
4. After creating all 4 partitions, again you need to examine the drives for any already existing raid using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]
|
||||
# mdadm -E /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
OR
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdb1 /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdd1 /dev/sde1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check All Disks for Raid
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: The above outputs shows that there isn’t any super-block detected on all four newly created partitions, that means we can move forward to create RAID 10 on these drives.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 2: Creating ‘md’ RAID Device ####
|
||||
|
||||
5. Now it’s time to create a ‘md’ (i.e. /dev/md0) device, using ‘mdadm’ raid management tool. Before, creating device, your system must have ‘mdadm’ tool installed, if not install it first.
|
||||
|
||||
# yum install mdadm [on RedHat systems]
|
||||
# apt-get install mdadm [on Debain systems]
|
||||
|
||||
Once ‘mdadm’ tool installed, you can now create a ‘md’ raid device using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=10 --raid-devices=4 /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
6. Next verify the newly created raid device using the ‘cat’ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create md raid Device
|
||||
|
||||
7. Next, examine all the 4 drives using the below command. The output of the below command will be long as it displays the information of all 4 disks.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
8. Next, check the details of Raid Array with the help of following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid Array Details
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: You see in the above results, that the status of Raid was active and re-syncing.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 3: Creating Filesystem ####
|
||||
|
||||
9. Create a file system using ext4 for ‘md0′ and mount it under ‘/mnt/raid10‘. Here, I’ve used ext4, but you can use any filesystem type if you want.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkfs.ext4 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create md Filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
10. After creating filesystem, mount the created file-system under ‘/mnt/raid10‘ and list the contents of the mount point using ‘ls -l’ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /mnt/raid10
|
||||
# mount /dev/md0 /mnt/raid10/
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid10/
|
||||
|
||||
Next, add some files under mount point and append some text in any one of the file and check the content.
|
||||
|
||||
# touch /mnt/raid10/raid10_files.txt
|
||||
# ls -l /mnt/raid10/
|
||||
# echo "raid 10 setup with 4 disks" > /mnt/raid10/raid10_files.txt
|
||||
# cat /mnt/raid10/raid10_files.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Mount md Device
|
||||
|
||||
11. For automounting, open the ‘/etc/fstab‘ file and append the below entry in fstab, may be mount point will differ according to your environment. Save and quit using wq!.
|
||||
|
||||
# vim /etc/fstab
|
||||
|
||||
/dev/md0 /mnt/raid10 ext4 defaults 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoMount md Device
|
||||
|
||||
12. Next, verify the ‘/etc/fstab‘ file for any errors before restarting the system using ‘mount -a‘ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -av
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Errors in Fstab
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 4: Save RAID Configuration ####
|
||||
|
||||
13. By default RAID don’t have a config file, so we need to save it manually after making all the above steps, to preserve these settings during system boot.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Save Raid10 Configuration
|
||||
|
||||
That’s it, we have created RAID 10 using method 1, this method is the easier one. Now let’s move forward to setup RAID 10 using method 2.
|
||||
|
||||
### Method 2: Creating RAID 10 ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. In method 2, we have to define 2 sets of RAID 1 and then we need to define a RAID 0 using those created RAID 1 sets. Here, what we will do is to first create 2 mirrors (RAID1) and then striping over RAID0.
|
||||
|
||||
First, list the disks which are all available for creating RAID 10.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
List 4 Devices
|
||||
|
||||
2. Partition the all 4 disks using ‘fdisk’ command. For partitioning, you can follow #step 3 above.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdb
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdc
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sde
|
||||
|
||||
3. After partitioning all 4 disks, now examine the disks for any existing raid blocks.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-e]
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sd[b-e]1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Examine 4 Disks
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 1: Creating RAID 1 ####
|
||||
|
||||
4. First let me create 2 sets of RAID 1 using 4 disks ‘sdb1′ and ‘sdc1′ and other set using ‘sdd1′ & ‘sde1′.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md1 --metadata=1.2 --level=1 --raid-devices=2 /dev/sd[b-c]1
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md2 --metadata=1.2 --level=1 --raid-devices=2 /dev/sd[d-e]1
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creating Raid 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Details of Raid 1
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 2: Creating RAID 0 ####
|
||||
|
||||
5. Next, create the RAID 0 using md1 and md2 devices.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --create /dev/md0 --level=0 --raid-devices=2 /dev/md1 /dev/md2
|
||||
# cat /proc/mdstat
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creating Raid 0
|
||||
|
||||
#### Step 3: Save RAID Configuration ####
|
||||
|
||||
6. We need to save the Configuration under ‘/etc/mdadm.conf‘ to load all raid devices in every reboot times.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail --scan --verbose >> /etc/mdadm.conf
|
||||
|
||||
After this, we need to follow #step 3 Creating file system of method 1.
|
||||
|
||||
That’s it! we have created RAID 1+0 using method 2. We will loose two disks space here, but the performance will be excellent compared to any other raid setups.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
Here we have created RAID 10 using two methods. RAID 10 has good performance and redundancy too. Hope this helps you to understand about RAID 10 Nested Raid level. Let us see how to grow an existing raid array and much more in my upcoming articles.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid-10-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
|
||||
struggling 翻译中
|
||||
Growing an Existing RAID Array and Removing Failed Disks in Raid – Part 7
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
Every newbies will get confuse of the word array. Array is just a collection of disks. In other words, we can call array as a set or group. Just like a set of eggs containing 6 numbers. Likewise RAID Array contains number of disks, it may be 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 etc. Hope now you know what Array is.
|
||||
|
||||
Here we will see how to grow (extend) an existing array or raid group. For example, if we are using 2 disks in an array to form a raid 1 set, and in some situation if we need more space in that group, we can extend the size of an array using mdadm –grow command, just by adding one of the disk to the existing array. After growing (adding disk to an existing array), we will see how to remove one of the failed disk from array.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Growing Raid Array and Removing Failed Disks
|
||||
|
||||
Assume that one of the disk is little weak and need to remove that disk, till it fails let it under use, but we need to add one of the spare drive and grow the mirror before it fails, because we need to save our data. While the weak disk fails we can remove it from array this is the concept we are going to see in this topic.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Features of RAID Growth ####
|
||||
|
||||
- We can grow (extend) the size of any raid set.
|
||||
- We can remove the faulty disk after growing raid array with new disk.
|
||||
- We can grow raid array without any downtime.
|
||||
|
||||
Requirements
|
||||
|
||||
- To grow an RAID array, we need an existing RAID set (Array).
|
||||
- We need extra disks to grow the Array.
|
||||
- Here I’m using 1 disk to grow the existing array.
|
||||
|
||||
Before we learn about growing and recovering of Array, we have to know about the basics of RAID levels and setups. Follow the below links to know about those setups.
|
||||
|
||||
- [Understanding Basic RAID Concepts – Part 1][1]
|
||||
- [Creating a Software Raid 0 in Linux – Part 2][2]
|
||||
|
||||
#### My Server Setup ####
|
||||
|
||||
Operating System : CentOS 6.5 Final
|
||||
IP Address : 192.168.0.230
|
||||
Hostname : grow.tecmintlocal.com
|
||||
2 Existing Disks : 1 GB
|
||||
1 Additional Disk : 1 GB
|
||||
|
||||
Here, my already existing RAID has 2 number of disks with each size is 1GB and we are now adding one more disk whose size is 1GB to our existing raid array.
|
||||
|
||||
### Growing an Existing RAID Array ###
|
||||
|
||||
1. Before growing an array, first list the existing Raid array using the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Existing Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: The above output shows that I’ve already has two disks in Raid array with raid1 level. Now here we are adding one more disk to an existing array,
|
||||
|
||||
2. Now let’s add the new disk “sdd” and create a partition using ‘fdisk‘ command.
|
||||
|
||||
# fdisk /dev/sdd
|
||||
|
||||
Please use the below instructions to create a partition on /dev/sdd drive.
|
||||
|
||||
- Press ‘n‘ for creating new partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘P‘ for Primary partition.
|
||||
- Then choose ‘1‘ to be the first partition.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the created partition.
|
||||
- Here, we are selecting ‘fd‘ as my type is RAID.
|
||||
- Next press ‘p‘ to print the defined partition.
|
||||
- Then again use ‘p‘ to print the changes what we have made.
|
||||
- Use ‘w‘ to write the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create New sdd Partition
|
||||
|
||||
3. Once new sdd partition created, you can verify it using below command.
|
||||
|
||||
# ls -l /dev/ | grep sd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Confirm sdd Partition
|
||||
|
||||
4. Next, examine the newly created disk for any existing raid, before adding to the array.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --examine /dev/sdd1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Check Raid on sdd Partition
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: The above output shows that the disk has no super-blocks detected, means we can move forward to add a new disk to an existing array.
|
||||
|
||||
4. To add the new partition /dev/sdd1 in existing array md0, use the following command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --manage /dev/md0 --add /dev/sdd1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Add Disk To Raid-Array
|
||||
|
||||
5. Once the new disk has been added, check for the added disk in our array using.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Confirm Disk Added to Raid
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: In the above output, you can see the drive has been added as a spare. Here, we already having 2 disks in the array, but what we are expecting is 3 devices in array for that we need to grow the array.
|
||||
|
||||
6. To grow the array we have to use the below command.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --grow --raid-devices=3 /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Grow Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
Now we can see the third disk (sdd1) has been added to array, after adding third disk it will sync the data from other two disks.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Confirm Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
**Note**: For large size disk it will take hours to sync the contents. Here I have used 1GB virtual disk, so its done very quickly within seconds.
|
||||
|
||||
### Removing Disks from Array ###
|
||||
|
||||
7. After the data has been synced to new disk ‘sdd1‘ from other two disks, that means all three disks now have same contents.
|
||||
|
||||
As I told earlier let’s assume that one of the disk is weak and needs to be removed, before it fails. So, now assume disk ‘sdc1‘ is weak and needs to be removed from an existing array.
|
||||
|
||||
Before removing a disk we have to mark the disk as failed one, then only we can able to remove it.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --fail /dev/md0 /dev/sdc1
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Disk Fail in Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
From the above output, we clearly see that the disk was marked as faulty at the bottom. Even its faulty, we can see the raid devices are 3, failed 1 and state was degraded.
|
||||
|
||||
Now we have to remove the faulty drive from the array and grow the array with 2 devices, so that the raid devices will be set to 2 devices as before.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --remove /dev/md0 /dev/sdc1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Remove Disk in Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
8. Once the faulty drive is removed, now we’ve to grow the raid array using 2 disks.
|
||||
|
||||
# mdadm --grow --raid-devices=2 /dev/md0
|
||||
# mdadm --detail /dev/md0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Grow Disks in Raid Array
|
||||
|
||||
From the about output, you can see that our array having only 2 devices. If you need to grow the array again, follow the same steps as described above. If you need to add a drive as spare, mark it as spare so that if the disk fails, it will automatically active and rebuild.
|
||||
|
||||
### Conclusion ###
|
||||
|
||||
In the article, we’ve seen how to grow an existing raid set and how to remove a faulty disk from an array after re-syncing the existing contents. All these steps can be done without any downtime. During data syncing, system users, files and applications will not get affected in any case.
|
||||
|
||||
In next, article I will show you how to manage the RAID, till then stay tuned to updates and don’t forget to add your comments.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/grow-raid-array-in-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Babin Lonston][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/babinlonston/
|
||||
[1]:http://www.tecmint.com/understanding-raid-setup-in-linux/
|
||||
[2]:http://www.tecmint.com/create-raid0-in-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
XLCYun translating.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
How To Fix System Program Problem Detected In Ubuntu 14.04
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For the last couple of weeks, (almost) every time I was greeted with **system program problem detected on startup in Ubuntu 15.04**. I ignored it for sometime but it was quite annoying after a certain point. You won’t be too happy as well if you are greeted by a pop-up displaying this every time you boot in to the system:
|
||||
|
||||
> System program problem detected
|
||||
>
|
||||
> Do you want to report the problem now?
|
||||
>
|
||||
> 
|
||||
|
||||
I know if you are an Ubuntu user you might have faced this annoying pop-up sometimes for sure. In this post we are going to see what to do with “system program problem detected” report in Ubuntu 14.04 and 15.04.
|
||||
|
||||
### What to do with “system program problem detected” error in Ubuntu? ###
|
||||
|
||||
#### So what exactly is this notifier all about? ####
|
||||
|
||||
Basically, this notifies you of a crash in your system. Don’t panic by the word ‘crash’. It’s not a major issue and your system is very much usable. It just that some program crashed some time in the past and Ubuntu wants you to decide whether or not you want to report this crash report to developers so that they could fix this issue.
|
||||
|
||||
#### So, we click on Report problem and it will vanish? ####
|
||||
|
||||
No, not really. Even if you click on report problem, you’ll be ultimately greeted with a pop up like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[Sorry, Ubuntu has experienced an internal error][1] is the apport that will further open a web browser and then you can file a bug report by logging or creating an account with [Launchpad][2]. You see, it is a complicated procedure which will take around four steps to complete.
|
||||
|
||||
#### But, I want to help developers and let them know of the bugs! ####
|
||||
|
||||
That’s very thoughtful of you and the right thing to do. But there are two issues here. First, there are high chances that the bug would have already been reported. Second, even if you take the pain of reporting the crash, it’s not a guarantee that you won’t see it again.
|
||||
|
||||
#### So, you suggesting to not report the crash? ####
|
||||
|
||||
Yes and no. Report the crash when you see it the first time, if you want. You can see the crashing program under “Show Details” in the above picture. But if you see it repetitively or if you do not want to report the bug, I advise you to get rid of the system crash once and for all.
|
||||
|
||||
### Fix “system program problem detected” error in Ubuntu ###
|
||||
|
||||
The crash reports are stored in /var/crash directory in Ubuntu. If you look in to this directory, you should see some files ending with crash.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What I suggest is that you delete these crash reports. Open a terminal and use the following command:
|
||||
|
||||
sudo rm /var/crash/*
|
||||
|
||||
This will delete all the content of directory /var/crash. This way you won’t be annoyed by the pop up for the programs crash that happened in the past. But if a programs crashes again, you’ll again see system program problem detected error. You can either remove the crash reports again, like we just did, or you can disable the Apport (debug tool) and permanently get rid of the pop-ups.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Permanently get rid of system error pop up in Ubuntu ####
|
||||
|
||||
If you do this, you’ll never be notified about any program crash that happens in the system. If you ask my view, I would say it’s not that bad a thing unless you are willing to file bug reports. If you have no intention of filing a bug report, the crash notifications and their absence will make no difference.
|
||||
|
||||
To disable the Apport and get rid of system crash report completely, open a terminal and use the following command to edit the Apport settings file:
|
||||
|
||||
gksu gedit /etc/default/apport
|
||||
|
||||
The content of the file is:
|
||||
|
||||
# set this to 0 to disable apport, or to 1 to enable it
|
||||
# you can temporarily override this with
|
||||
# sudo service apport start force_start=1
|
||||
enabled=1
|
||||
|
||||
Change the **enabled=1** to **enabled=0**. Save and close the file. You won’t see any pop up for crash reports after doing this. Obvious to point out that if you want to enable the crash reports again, you just need to change the same file and put enabled as 1 again.
|
||||
|
||||
#### Did it work for you? ####
|
||||
|
||||
I hope this tutorial helped you to fix system program problem detected in Ubuntu 14.04 and Ubuntu 15.04. Let me know if this tip helped you to get rid of this annoyance.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/how-to-fix-system-program-problem-detected-ubuntu/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[译者ID](https://github.com/译者ID)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://itsfoss.com/how-to-solve-sorry-ubuntu-12-04-has-experienced-an-internal-error/
|
||||
[2]:https://launchpad.net/
|
||||
@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
|
||||
如何打造自己的Linux发行版
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
您是否想过打造您自己的Linux发行版？每个Linux用户在他们使用Linux的过程中都想过做一个他们自己的发行版，至少一次。我也不例外，作为一个Linux菜鸟，我也考虑过开发一个自己的Linux发行版。开发一个Linux发行版被叫做Linux From Scratch (LFS)。
|
||||
|
||||
在开始之前，我总结了一些LFS的内容，如下：
|
||||
|
||||
### 1. 那些想要打造他们自己的Linux发行版的人应该了解打造一个Linux发行版（打造意味着从头开始）与配置一个已有的Linux发行版的不同 ###
|
||||
|
||||
如果您只是想调整下屏幕显示、定制登录以及拥有更好的外表和使用体验。您可以选择任何一个Linux发行版并且按照您的喜好进行个性化配置。此外，有许多配置工具可以帮助您。
|
||||
|
||||
如果您想打包所有必须的文件、boot-loaders和内核，并选择什么该被包括进来，然后依靠自己编译这一切东西。那么您需要Linux From Scratch (LFS)。
|
||||
|
||||
**注意**：如果您只想要定制Linux系统的外表和体验，这个指南不适合您。但如果您真的想打造一个Linux发行版，并且向了解怎么开始以及一些其他的信息，那么这个指南正是为您而写。
|
||||
|
||||
### 2. 打造一个Linux发行版（LFS）的好处 ###
|
||||
|
||||
- 您将了解Linux系统的内部工作机制
|
||||
- 您将开发一个灵活的适应您需求的系统
|
||||
- 您开发的系统（LFS）将会非常紧凑，因为您对该包含/不该包含什么拥有绝对的掌控
|
||||
- 您开发的系统（LFS）在安全性上会更好
|
||||
|
||||
### 3. 打造一个Linux发行版（LFS）的坏处 ###
|
||||
|
||||
打造一个Linux系统意味着将所有需要的东西放在一起并且编译之。这需要许多查阅、耐心和时间。而且您需要一个可用的Linux系统和足够的磁盘空间来打造Linux系统。
|
||||
|
||||
### 4. 有趣的是，Gentoo/GNU Linux在某种意义上最接近于LFS。Gentoo和LFS都是完全从源码编译的定制的Linux系统 ###
|
||||
|
||||
### 5. 您应该是一个有经验的Linux用户，对编译包、解决依赖有相当的了解，并且是个shell脚本的专家。了解一门编程语言（C最好）将会使事情变得容易些。但哪怕您是一个新手，只要您是一个优秀的学习者，可以很快的掌握知识，您也可以开始。最重要的是不要在LFS过程中丢失您的热情。 ###
|
||||
|
||||
如果您不够坚定，恐怕会在LFS进行到一半时放弃。
|
||||
|
||||
### 6. 现在您需要一步一步的指导来打造一个Linux。LFS是打造Linux的官方指南。我们的搭档的站点tradepub也为我们的读者制作了LFS的指南，这同样是免费的。 ###
|
||||
|
||||
您可以从下面的链接下载Linux From Scratch的书籍：
|
||||
|
||||
[][1]
|
||||
|
||||
下载: [Linux From Scratch][1]
|
||||
|
||||
### 关于：Linux From Scratch ###
|
||||
|
||||
这本书是由LFS的项目领头人Gerard Beekmans创作的，由Matthew Burgess和Bruse Dubbs做编辑，两人都是LFS项目的联合领导人。这本书内容很广泛，有338页长。
|
||||
|
||||
书中内容包括：介绍LFS、准备构建、构建Linux（LFS）、建立启动脚本、使LFS可以引导和附录。其中涵盖了您想知道的LFS项目的所有东西。
|
||||
|
||||
这本书还给出了编译一个包的预估时间。预估的时间以编译第一个包的时间作为参考。所有的东西都以易于理解的方式呈现，甚至对于新手来说。
|
||||
|
||||
如果您有充裕的时间并且真正对构建自己的Linux发行版感兴趣，那么您绝对不会错过下载这个电子书（免费下载）的机会。您需要做的，便是照着这本书在一个工作的Linux系统（任何Linux发行版，足够的磁盘空间即可）中开始构建您自己的Linux系统，时间和热情。
|
||||
|
||||
如果Linux使您着迷，如果您想自己动手构建一个自己的Linux发行版，这便是现阶段您应该知道的全部了，其他的信息您可以参考上面链接的书中的内容。
|
||||
|
||||
请让我了解您阅读/使用这本书的经历，这本详尽的LFS指南的使用是否足够简单？如果您已经构建了一个LFS并且想给我们的读者一些建议，欢迎留言和反馈。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.tecmint.com/create-custom-linux-distribution-from-scratch/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Avishek Kumar][a]
|
||||
译者：[wwy-hust](https://github.com/wwy-hust)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.tecmint.com/author/avishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://tecmint.tradepub.com/free/w_linu01/prgm.cgi
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
|
||||
使用去重加密工具来备份
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
在体积和价值方面，数据都在增长。快速而可靠地备份和恢复数据正变得越来越重要。社会已经适应了技术的广泛使用，并懂得了如何依靠电脑和移动设备，但很少有人能够处理丢失重要数据的现实。在遭受数据损失的公司中，30% 的公司将在一年内损失一半市值，70% 的公司将在五年内停止交易。这更加凸显了数据的价值。
|
||||
|
||||
随着数据在体积上的增长，提高存储利用率尤为重要。In Computing(注:这里不知如何翻译)，数据去重是一种特别的数据压缩技术，因为它可以消除重复数据的拷贝，所以这个技术可以提高存储利用率。
|
||||
|
||||
数据并不仅仅只有其创造者感兴趣。政府、竞争者、犯罪分子、偷窥者可能都热衷于获取你的数据。他们或许想偷取你的数据，从你那里进行敲诈，或看你正在做什么。对于保护你的数据，加密是非常必要的。
|
||||
|
||||
所以，解决方法是我们需要一个去重加密备份软件。
|
||||
|
||||
对于所有的用户而言，做文件备份是一件非常必要的事，至今为止许多用户还没有采取足够的措施来保护他们的数据。一台电脑不论是工作在一个合作的环境中，还是供私人使用，机器的硬盘可能在没有任何警告的情况下挂掉。另外，有些数据丢失可能是人为的错误所引发的。如果没有做经常性的备份，数据也可能不可避免地失去掉，即使请了专业的数据恢复公司来帮忙。
|
||||
|
||||
这篇文章将对 6 个去重加密备份工具进行简要的介绍。
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Attic ###
|
||||
|
||||
Attic 是一个可用于去重、加密，验证完整性的用 Python 写的压缩备份程序。Attic 的主要目标是提供一个高效且安全的方式来备份数据。Attic 使用的数据去重技术使得它适用于每日备份，因为只需存储改变的数据。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点有:
|
||||
|
||||
- 易用
|
||||
- 可高效利用存储空间，通过检查冗余的数据，数据块大小的去重被用来减少存储所用的空间
|
||||
- 可选的数据加密，使用 256 位的 AES 加密算法。数据的完整性和可靠性使用 HMAC-SHA256 来检查
|
||||
- 使用 SDSH 来进行离线备份
|
||||
- 备份可作为文件系统来挂载
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [attic-backup.org][1]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Borg ###
|
||||
|
||||
Borg 是 Attic 的分支。它是一个安全的开源备份程序，被设计用来高效地存储那些新的或修改过的数据。
|
||||
|
||||
Borg 的主要目标是提供一个高效、安全的方式来存储数据。Borg 使用的数据去重技术使得它适用于每日备份，因为只需存储改变的数据。认证加密使得它适用于不完全可信的目标的存储。
|
||||
|
||||
Borg 由 Python 写成。Borg 于 2015 年 5 月被创造出来，为了回应让新的代码或重大的改变带入 Attic 的困难。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点包括:
|
||||
|
||||
- 易用
|
||||
- 可高效利用存储空间，通过检查冗余的数据，数据块大小的去重被用来减少存储所用的空间
|
||||
- 可选的数据加密，使用 256 位的 AES 加密算法。数据的完整性和可靠性使用 HMAC-SHA256 来检查
|
||||
- 使用 SDSH 来进行离线备份
|
||||
- 备份可作为文件系统来挂载
|
||||
|
||||
Borg 与 Attic 不兼容。
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [borgbackup.github.io/borgbackup][2]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Obnam ###
|
||||
|
||||
Obnam (OBligatory NAMe) 是一个易用、安全的基于 Python 的备份程序。备份可被存储在本地硬盘或通过 SSH SFTP 协议存储到网上。若使用了备份服务器，它并不需要任何特殊的软件，只需要使用 SSH 即可。
|
||||
|
||||
Obnam 通过将数据数据分成数据块，并单独存储它们来达到去重的目的，每次通过增量备份来生成备份，每次备份的生成就像是一次新的快照，但事实上是真正的增量备份。Obnam 由 Lars Wirzenius 开发。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点有:
|
||||
|
||||
- 易用
|
||||
- 快照备份
|
||||
- 数据去重，跨文件，生成备份
|
||||
- 可使用 GnuPG 来加密备份
|
||||
- 向一个单独的仓库中备份多个客户端的数据
|
||||
- 备份检查点 (创建一个保存点，以每 100MB 或其他容量)
|
||||
- 包含多个选项来调整性能，包括调整 lru-size 或 upload-queue-size
|
||||
- 支持 MD5 校验和算法来识别重复的数据块
|
||||
- 通过 SFTP 将备份存储到一个服务器上
|
||||
- 同时支持 push(即在客户端上运行) 和 pull(即在服务器上运行)
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [obnam.org][3]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### Duplicity ###
|
||||
|
||||
Duplicity 持续地以 tar 文件格式备份文件和目录，并使用 GnuPG 来进行加密，同时将它们上传到远程(或本地)的文件服务器上。它可以使用 ssh/scp, 本地文件获取, rsync, ftp, 和 Amazon S3 等来传递数据。
|
||||
|
||||
因为 duplicity 使用了 librsync， 增加的存档高效地利用了存储空间，且只记录自从上次备份依赖改变的那部分文件。由于该软件使用 GnuPG 来机密或对这些归档文件进行进行签名，这使得它们免于服务器的监视或修改。
|
||||
|
||||
当前 duplicity 支持备份删除的文件，全部的 unix 权限，目录，符号链接， fifo 等。
|
||||
|
||||
duplicity 软件包还包含有 rdiffdir 工具。 Rdiffdir 是 librsync 的 rdiff 针对目录的扩展。它可以用来生成对目录的签名和差异，对普通文件也有效。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点有:
|
||||
|
||||
- 使用简单
|
||||
- 对归档进行加密和签名(使用 GnuPG)
|
||||
- 高效使用带宽和存储空间，使用 rsync 的算法
|
||||
- 标准的文件格式
|
||||
- 可选择多种远程协议
|
||||
- 本地存储
|
||||
- scp/ssh
|
||||
- ftp
|
||||
- rsync
|
||||
- HSI
|
||||
- WebDAV
|
||||
- Amazon S3
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [duplicity.nongnu.org][4]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### ZBackup ###
|
||||
|
||||
ZBackup 是一个通用的全局去重备份工具。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点包括:
|
||||
|
||||
- 存储数据的并行 LZMA 或 LZO 压缩，在一个仓库中，你还可以混合使用 LZMA 和 LZO
|
||||
- 内置对存储数据的 AES 加密
|
||||
- 可选择地删除旧的备份数据
|
||||
- 可以使用 64 位的滚动哈希算法，使得文件冲突的数量几乎为零
|
||||
- Repository consists of immutable files. No existing files are ever modified ====
|
||||
- 用 C++ 写成，只需少量的库文件依赖
|
||||
- 在生成环境中可以安全使用
|
||||
- 可以在不同仓库中进行数据交换而不必再进行压缩
|
||||
- 可以使用 64 位改进型 Rabin-Karp 滚动哈希算法
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [zbackup.org][5]
|
||||
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
### bup ###
|
||||
|
||||
bup 是一个用 Python 写的备份程序，其名称是 "backup" 的缩写。在 git packfile 文件的基础上， bup 提供了一个高效的方式来备份一个系统，提供快速的增量备份和全局去重(在文件中或文件里，甚至包括虚拟机镜像)。
|
||||
|
||||
bup 在 LGPL 版本 2 协议下发行。
|
||||
|
||||
其特点包括:
|
||||
|
||||
- 全局去重 (在文件中或文件里，甚至包括虚拟机镜像)
|
||||
- 使用一个滚动的校验和算法(类似于 rsync) 来将大文件分为多个数据块
|
||||
- 使用来自 git 的 packfile 格式
|
||||
- 直接写入 packfile 文件，以此提供快速的增量备份
|
||||
- 可以使用 "par2" 冗余来恢复冲突的备份
|
||||
- 可以作为一个 FUSE 文件系统来挂载你的 bup 仓库
|
||||
|
||||
网站: [bup.github.io][6]
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.linuxlinks.com/article/20150628060000607/BackupTools.html
|
||||
|
||||
译者：[FSSlc](https://github.com/FSSlc)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[1]:https://attic-backup.org/
|
||||
[2]:https://borgbackup.github.io/borgbackup/
|
||||
[3]:http://obnam.org/
|
||||
[4]:http://duplicity.nongnu.org/
|
||||
[5]:http://zbackup.org/
|
||||
[6]:https://bup.github.io/
|
||||
358
translated/tech/20150706 PHP Security.md
Normal file
358
translated/tech/20150706 PHP Security.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
|
||||
PHP 安全
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### 简介 ###
|
||||
|
||||
为提供互联网服务，当你在开发代码的时候必须时刻保持安全意识。可能大部分 PHP 脚本都对安全问题不敏感；这很大程度上是因为有大量的无经验程序员在使用这门语言。但是，没有理由让你基于粗略估计你代码的影响性而有不一致的安全策略。当你在服务器上放任何经济相关的东西时，就有可能会有人尝试破解它。创建一个论坛程序或者任何形式的购物车，被攻击的可能性就上升到了无穷大。
|
||||
|
||||
### 背景 ###
|
||||
|
||||
为了确保你的 web 内容安全，这里有一些一般的安全准则：
|
||||
|
||||
#### 别相信表单 ####
|
||||
|
||||
攻击表单很简单。通过使用一个简单的 JavaScript 技巧，你可以限制你的表单只允许在评分域中填写 1 到 5 的数字。如果有人关闭了他们浏览器的 JavaScript 功能或者提交自定义的表单数据，你客户端的验证就失败了。
|
||||
|
||||
用户主要通过表单参数和你的脚本交互，因此他们是最大的安全风险。你应该学到什么呢？总是要验证 PHP 脚本中传递到其它任何 PHP 脚本的数据。在本文中，我们向你演示了如何分析和防范跨站点脚本（XSS）攻击，它可能劫持用户凭据（甚至更严重）。你也会看到如何防止会玷污或毁坏你数据的 MySQL 注入攻击。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 别相信用户 ####
|
||||
|
||||
假设你网站获取的每一份数据都充满了有害的代码。清理每一部分，就算你相信没有人会尝试攻击你的站点。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 关闭全局变量 ####
|
||||
|
||||
你可能会有的最大安全漏洞是启用了 register\_globals 配置参数。幸运的是，PHP 4.2 及以后版本默认关闭了这个配置。如果打开了 **register\_globals**，你可以在你的 php.ini 文件中通过改变 register\_globals 变量为 Off 关闭该功能：
|
||||
|
||||
register_globals = Off
|
||||
|
||||
新手程序员觉得注册全局变量很方便，但他们不会意识到这个设置有多么危险。一个启用了全局变量的服务器会自动为全局变量赋任何形式的参数。为了了解它如何工作以及为什么有危险，让我们来看一个例子。
|
||||
|
||||
假设你有一个称为 process.php 的脚本，它会向你的数据库插入表单数据。初始的表单像下面这样：
|
||||
|
||||
<input name="username" type="text" size="15" maxlength="64">
|
||||
|
||||
运行 process.php 的时候，启用了注册全局变量的 PHP 会为该参数赋值为 $username 变量。这会比通过 **$\_POST['username']** 或 **$\_GET['username']** 访问它节省敲击次数。不幸的是，这也会给你留下安全问题，因为 PHP 设置该变量的值为通过 GET 或 POST 参数发送到脚本的任何值，如果你没有显示地初始化该变量并且你不希望任何人去操作它，这就会有一个大问题。
|
||||
|
||||
看下面的脚本，假如 $authorized 变量的值为 true，它会给用户显示验证数据。正常情况下，只有当用户正确通过了假想的 authenticated\_user() 函数验证，$authorized 变量的值才会被设置为真。但是如果你启用了 **register\_globals**，任何人都可以发送一个 GET 参数，例如 authorized=1 去覆盖它：
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
// Define $authorized = true only if user is authenticated
|
||||
if (authenticated_user()) {
|
||||
$authorized = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
这个故事的寓意是，你应该从预定义的服务器变量中获取表单数据。所有通过 post 表单传递到你 web 页面的数据都会自动保存到一个称为 **$\_POST** 的大数组中，所有的 GET 数据都保存在 **$\_GET** 大数组中。文件上传信息保存在一个称为 **$\_FILES** 的特殊数据中。另外，还有一个称为 **$\_REQUEST** 的复合变量。
|
||||
|
||||
要从一个 POST 方法表单中访问 username 域，可以使用 **$\_POST['username']**。如果 username 在 URL 中就使用 **$\_GET['username']**。如果你不确定值来自哪里，用 **$\_REQUEST['username']**。
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$post_value = $_POST['post_value'];
|
||||
$get_value = $_GET['get_value'];
|
||||
$some_variable = $_REQUEST['some_value'];
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
$\_REQUEST 是 $\_GET、$\_POST、和 $\_COOKIE 数组的结合。如果你有两个或多个值有相同的参数名称，注意 PHP 会使用哪个。默认的顺序是 cookie、POST、然后是 GET。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 推荐安全配置选项 ####
|
||||
|
||||
这里有几个会影响安全功能的 PHP 配置设置。下面是一些显然应该用于生产服务器的：
|
||||
|
||||
- **register\_globals** 设置为 off
|
||||
- **safe\_mode** 设置为 off
|
||||
- **error\_reporting** 设置为 off。如果出现错误了，这会向用户浏览器发送可见的错误报告信息。对于生产服务器，使用错误日志代替。开发服务器如果在防火墙后面就可以启用错误日志。
|
||||
- 停用这些函数：system()、exec()、passthru()、shell\_exec()、proc\_open()、和 popen()。
|
||||
- **open\_basedir** 为 /tmp（以便保存会话信息）目录和 web 根目录设置值，以便脚本不能访问选定区域外的文件。
|
||||
- **expose\_php** 设置为 off。该功能会向 Apache 头添加包含版本数字的 PHP 签名。
|
||||
- **allow\_url\_fopen** 设置为 off。如果你小心在你代码中访问文件的方式-也就是你验证所有输入参数，这并不严格需要。
|
||||
- **allow\_url\_include** 设置为 off。这实在没有明智的理由任何人会想要通过 HTTP 访问包含的文件。
|
||||
|
||||
一般来说，如果你发现想要使用这些功能的代码，你就不应该相信它。尤其要小心会使用类似 system() 函数的代码-它几乎肯定有缺陷。
|
||||
|
||||
启用了这些设置后，让我们来看看一些特定的攻击以及能帮助你保护你服务器的方法。
|
||||
|
||||
### SQL 注入攻击 ###
|
||||
|
||||
由于 PHP 传递到 MySQL 数据库的查询语句是按照强大的 SQL 编程语言编写的，你就有某些人通过在 web 查询参数中使用 MySQL 语句尝试 SQL 注入攻击的风险。通过在参数中插入有害的 SQL 代码片段，攻击者会尝试进入（或破坏）你的服务器。
|
||||
|
||||
假如说你有一个最终会放入变量 $product 的表单参数，你使用了类似下面的 SQL 语句：
|
||||
|
||||
$sql = "select * from pinfo where product = '$product'";
|
||||
|
||||
如果参数是直接从表单中获得的，使用 PHP 自带的数据库特定转义函数，类似：
|
||||
|
||||
$sql = 'Select * from pinfo where product = '"'
|
||||
mysql_real_escape_string($product) . '"';
|
||||
|
||||
如果不这样做的话，有人也许会把下面的代码段放到表单参数中：
|
||||
|
||||
39'; DROP pinfo; SELECT 'FOO
|
||||
|
||||
$sql 的结果就是：
|
||||
|
||||
select product from pinfo where product = '39'; DROP pinfo; SELECT 'FOO'
|
||||
|
||||
由于分号是 MySQL 的语句分隔符，数据库会运行下面三条语句：
|
||||
|
||||
select * from pinfo where product = '39'
|
||||
DROP pinfo
|
||||
SELECT 'FOO'
|
||||
|
||||
好了，你丢失了你的表。
|
||||
|
||||
注意实际上 PHP 和 MySQL 不会运行这种特殊语法，因为 **mysql\_query()** 函数只允许每个请求处理一个语句。但是，一个子查询仍然会生效。
|
||||
|
||||
要防止 SQL 注入攻击，做这两件事：
|
||||
|
||||
- 总是验证所有参数。例如，如果需要一个数字，就要确保它是一个数字。
|
||||
- 总是对数据使用 mysql\_real\_escape\_string() 函数转义数据中的任何引号和双引号。
|
||||
|
||||
**注意：要自动转义任何表单数据，可以启用魔术引号（Magic Quotes）。**
|
||||
|
||||
一些 MySQL 破坏可以通过限制 MySQL 用户权限避免。任何 MySQL 账户可以限制为只允许对选定的表进行特定类型的查询。例如，你可以创建只能选择行的 MySQL 用户。但是，这对于动态数据并不十分有用，另外，如果你有敏感的用户信息，可能某些人能访问一些数据，但你并不希望如此。例如，一个访问账户数据的用户可能会尝试注入访问另一个账户号码的代码，而不是为当前会话指定的号码。
|
||||
|
||||
### 防止基本的 XSS 攻击 ###
|
||||
|
||||
XSS 表示跨站点脚本。不像大部分攻击，该漏洞发生在客户端。XSS 最常见的基本形式是在用户提交的内容中放入 JavaScript 以便偷取用户 cookie 中的数据。由于大部分站点使用 cookie 和 session 验证访客，偷取的数据可用于模拟该用于-如果是一个典型的用户账户就会深受麻烦，如果是管理员账户甚至是彻底的惨败。如果你不在站点中使用 cookie 和 session ID，你的用户就不容易被攻击，但你仍然应该明白这种攻击是如何工作的。
|
||||
|
||||
不像 MySQL 注入攻击，XSS 攻击很难预防。Yahoo、eBay、Apple、以及 Microsoft 都曾经受 XSS 影响。尽管攻击不包含 PHP，你可以使用 PHP 来剥离用户数据以防止攻击。为了防止 XSS 攻击，你应该限制和过滤用户提交给你站点的数据。正是因为这个原因大部分在线公告板都不允许在提交的数据中使用 HTML 标签，而是用自定义的标签格式代替，例如 **[b]** 和 **[linkto]**。
|
||||
|
||||
让我们来看一个如何防止这类攻击的简单脚本。对于更完善的解决办法，可以使用 SafeHHTML，本文的后面部分会讨论到。
|
||||
|
||||
function transform_HTML($string, $length = null) {
|
||||
// Helps prevent XSS attacks
|
||||
// Remove dead space.
|
||||
$string = trim($string);
|
||||
// Prevent potential Unicode codec problems.
|
||||
$string = utf8_decode($string);
|
||||
// HTMLize HTML-specific characters.
|
||||
$string = htmlentities($string, ENT_NOQUOTES);
|
||||
$string = str_replace("#", "#", $string);
|
||||
$string = str_replace("%", "%", $string);
|
||||
$length = intval($length);
|
||||
if ($length > 0) {
|
||||
$string = substr($string, 0, $length);
|
||||
}
|
||||
return $string;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
这个函数将 HTML 特定字符转换为 HTML 字面字符。一个浏览器对任何通过这个脚本的 HTML 以无标记的文本呈现。例如，考虑下面的 HTML 字符串：
|
||||
|
||||
<STRONG>Bold Text</STRONG>
|
||||
|
||||
一般情况下，HTML 会显示为：
|
||||
|
||||
Bold Text
|
||||
|
||||
但是，通过 **transform\_HTML()** 后，它就像初始输入一样呈现。原因是处理的字符串中标签字符串是 HTML 条目。**transform\_HTML()** 结果字符串的纯文本看起来像下面这样：
|
||||
|
||||
<STRONG>Bold Text</STRONG>
|
||||
|
||||
该函数的实质是 htmlentities() 函数调用，它会将 <、>、和 & 转换为 **<**、**>**、和 **&**。尽管这会处理大部分的普通攻击，有经验的 XSS 攻击者有另一种把戏：用十六进制或 UTF-8 编码恶意脚本，而不是采用普通的 ASCII 文本，从而希望能饶过你的过滤器。他们可以在 URL 的 GET 变量中发送代码，例如，“这是十六进制代码，你能帮我运行吗？” 一个十六进制例子看起来像这样：
|
||||
|
||||
<a href="http://host/a.php?variable=%22%3e %3c%53%43%52%49%50%54%3e%44%6f%73%6f%6d%65%74%68%69%6e%67%6d%61%6c%69%63%69%6f%75%73%3c%2f%53%43%52%49%50%54%3e">
|
||||
|
||||
浏览器渲染这信息的时候，结果就是：
|
||||
|
||||
<a href="http://host/a.php?variable="> <SCRIPT>Dosomethingmalicious</SCRIPT>
|
||||
|
||||
为了防止这种情况，transform\_HTML() 采用额外的步骤把 # 和 % 符号转换为它们的实体，从而避免十六进制攻击，并转换 UTF-8 编码的数据。
|
||||
|
||||
最后，为了防止某些人用很长的输入超载字符串从而导致某些东西崩溃，你可以添加一个可选的 $length 参数来截取你指定最大长度的字符串。
|
||||
|
||||
### 使用 SafeHTML ###
|
||||
|
||||
之前脚本的问题比较简单，它不允许任何类型的用户标记。不幸的是，这里有上百种方法能使 JavaScript 跳过用户的过滤器，从用户输入中剥离 HTML，没有方法可以防止这种情况。
|
||||
|
||||
当前，没有任何一个脚本能保证无法被破解，尽管有一些确实比大部分要好。有白名单和黑名单两种方法加固安全，白名单比较简单而且更加有效。
|
||||
|
||||
一个白名单解决方案是 PixelApes 的 SafeHTML 反跨站点脚本解析器。
|
||||
|
||||
SafeHTML 能识别有效 HTML，能追踪并剥离任何危险标签。它用另一个称为 HTMLSax 的软件包进行解析。
|
||||
|
||||
按照下面步骤安装和使用 SafeHTML：
|
||||
|
||||
1. 到 [http://pixel-apes.com/safehtml/?page=safehtml][1] 下载最新版本的 SafeHTML。
|
||||
1. 把文件放到你服务器的类文件夹。该文件夹包括 SafeHTML 和 HTMLSax 起作用需要的所有东西。
|
||||
1. 在脚本中包含 SafeHTML 类文件（safehtml.php）。
|
||||
1. 创建称为 $safehtml 的新 SafeHTML 对象。
|
||||
1. 用 $safehtml->parse() 方法清理你的数据。
|
||||
|
||||
这是一个完整的例子：
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
/* If you're storing the HTMLSax3.php in the /classes directory, along
|
||||
with the safehtml.php script, define XML_HTMLSAX3 as a null string. */
|
||||
define(XML_HTMLSAX3, '');
|
||||
// Include the class file.
|
||||
require_once('classes/safehtml.php');
|
||||
// Define some sample bad code.
|
||||
$data = "This data would raise an alert <script>alert('XSS Attack')</script>";
|
||||
// Create a safehtml object.
|
||||
$safehtml = new safehtml();
|
||||
// Parse and sanitize the data.
|
||||
$safe_data = $safehtml->parse($data);
|
||||
// Display result.
|
||||
echo 'The sanitized data is <br />' . $safe_data;
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
如果你想清理脚本中的任何其它数据，你不需要创建一个新的对象；在你的整个脚本中只需要使用 $safehtml->parse() 方法。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 什么可能会出现问题？ ####
|
||||
|
||||
你可能犯的最大错误是假设这个类能完全避免 XSS 攻击。SafeHTML 是一个相当复杂的脚本，几乎能检查所有事情，但没有什么是能保证的。你仍然需要对你的站点做参数验证。例如，该类不能检查给定变量的长度以确保能适应数据库的字段。它也不检查缓冲溢出问题。
|
||||
|
||||
XSS 攻击者很有创造力，他们使用各种各样的方法来尝试达到他们的目标。可以阅读 RSnake 的 XSS 教程[http://ha.ckers.org/xss.html][2] 看一下这里有多少种方法尝试使代码跳过过滤器。SafeHTML 项目有很好的程序员一直在尝试阻止 XSS 攻击，但无法保证某些人不会想起一些奇怪和新奇的方法来跳过过滤器。
|
||||
|
||||
**注意：XSS 攻击严重影响的一个例子 [http://namb.la/popular/tech.html][3]，其中显示了如何一步一步创建会超载 MySpace 服务器的 JavaScript XSS 蠕虫。**
|
||||
|
||||
### 用单向哈希保护数据 ###
|
||||
|
||||
该脚本对输入的数据进行单向转换-换句话说，它能对某人的密码产生哈希签名，但不能解码获得原始密码。为什么你希望这样呢？应用程序会存储密码。一个管理员不需要知道用户的密码-事实上，只有用户知道他的/她的密码是个好主意。系统（也仅有系统）应该能识别一个正确的密码；这是 Unix 多年来的密码安全模型。单向密码安全按照下面的方式工作：
|
||||
|
||||
1. 当一个用户或管理员创建或更改一个账户密码时，系统对密码进行哈希并保存结果。主机系统忽视明文密码。
|
||||
2. 当用户通过任何方式登录到系统时，再次对输入的密码进行哈希。
|
||||
3. 主机系统抛弃输入的明文密码。
|
||||
4. 当前新哈希的密码和之前保存的哈希相比较。
|
||||
5. 如果哈希的密码相匹配，系统就会授予访问权限。
|
||||
|
||||
主机系统完成这些并不需要知道原始密码；事实上，原始值完全不相关。一个副作用是，如果某人侵入系统并盗取了密码数据库，入侵者会获得很多哈希后的密码，但无法把它们反向转换为原始密码。当然，给足够时间、计算能力，以及弱用户密码，一个攻击者还是有可能采用字典攻击找出密码。因此，别轻易让人碰你的密码数据库，如果确实有人这样做了，让每个用户更改他们的密码。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 加密 Vs 哈希 ####
|
||||
|
||||
技术上来来说，这过程并不是加密。哈希和加密是不相同的，这有两个理由：
|
||||
|
||||
不像加密，数据不能被解密。
|
||||
|
||||
是有可能（但很不常见）两个不同的字符串会产生相同的哈希。并不能保证哈希是唯一的，因此别像数据库中的唯一键那样使用哈希。
|
||||
|
||||
function hash_ish($string) {
|
||||
return md5($string);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
md5() 函数基于 RSA 数据安全公司的消息摘要算法（即 MD5）返回一个由 32 个字符组成的十六进制串。然后你可以将那个 32 位字符串插入到数据库中，和另一个 md5 字符串相比较，或者就用这 32 个字符。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 破解脚本 ####
|
||||
|
||||
几乎不可能解密 MD5 数据。或者说很难。但是，你仍然需要好的密码，因为根据整个字典生成哈希数据库仍然很简单。这里有在线 MD5 字典，当你输入 **06d80eb0c50b49a509b49f2424e8c805** 后会得到结果 “dog”。因此，尽管技术上 MD5 不能被解密，这里仍然有漏洞-如果某人获得了你的密码数据库，你可以肯定他们肯定会使用 MD5 字典破译。因此，当你创建基于密码的系统的时候尤其要注意密码长度（最小 6 个字符，8 个或许会更好）和包括字母和数字。并确保字典中没有这个密码。
|
||||
|
||||
### 用 Mcrypt 加密数据 ###
|
||||
|
||||
如果你不需要以可阅读形式查看密码，采用 MD5 就足够了。不幸的是，这里并不总是有可选项-如果你提供以加密形式存储某人的信用卡信息，你可能需要在后面的某个点进行解密。
|
||||
|
||||
最早的一个解决方案是 Mcrypt 模块，用于允许 PHP 高速加密的附件。Mcrypt 库提供了超过 30 种计算方法用于加密，并且提供短语确保只有你（或者你的用户）可以解密数据。
|
||||
|
||||
让我们来看看使用方法。下面的脚本包含了使用 Mcrypt 加密和解密数据的函数：
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$data = "Stuff you want encrypted";
|
||||
$key = "Secret passphrase used to encrypt your data";
|
||||
$cipher = "MCRYPT_SERPENT_256";
|
||||
$mode = "MCRYPT_MODE_CBC";
|
||||
function encrypt($data, $key, $cipher, $mode) {
|
||||
// Encrypt data
|
||||
return (string)
|
||||
base64_encode
|
||||
(
|
||||
mcrypt_encrypt
|
||||
(
|
||||
$cipher,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_key_size($cipher, $mode)),
|
||||
$data,
|
||||
$mode,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_block_size($cipher, $mode))
|
||||
)
|
||||
);
|
||||
}
|
||||
function decrypt($data, $key, $cipher, $mode) {
|
||||
// Decrypt data
|
||||
return (string)
|
||||
mcrypt_decrypt
|
||||
(
|
||||
$cipher,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_key_size($cipher, $mode)),
|
||||
base64_decode($data),
|
||||
$mode,
|
||||
substr(md5($key),0,mcrypt_get_block_size($cipher, $mode))
|
||||
);
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
**mcrypt()** 函数需要几个信息：
|
||||
|
||||
- 需要加密的数据
|
||||
- 用于加密和解锁数据的短语，也称为键。
|
||||
- 用于加密数据的计算方法，也就是用于加密数据的算法。该脚本使用了 **MCRYPT\_SERPENT\_256**，但你可以从很多算法中选择，包括 **MCRYPT\_TWOFISH192**、**MCRYPT\_RC2**、**MCRYPT\_DES**、和 **MCRYPT\_LOKI97**。
|
||||
- 加密数据的模式。这里有几个你可以使用的模式，包括电子密码本（Electronic Codebook） 和加密反馈（Cipher Feedback）。该脚本使用 **MCRYPT\_MODE\_CBC** 密码块链接。
|
||||
- 一个 **初始化向量**-也称为 IV，或着一个种子-用于为加密算法设置种子的额外二进制位。也就是使算法更难于破解的额外信息。
|
||||
- 键和 IV 字符串的长度，这可能随着加密和块而不同。使用 **mcrypt\_get\_key\_size()** 和 **mcrypt\_get\_block\_size()** 函数获取合适的长度；然后用 **substr()** 函数将键的值截取为合适的长度。（如果键的长度比要求的短，别担心-Mcrypt 会用 0 填充。）
|
||||
|
||||
如果有人窃取了你的数据和短语，他们只能一个个尝试加密算法直到找到正确的那一个。因此，在使用它之前我们通过对键使用 **md5()** 函数增加安全，就算他们获取了数据和短语，入侵者也不能获得想要的东西。
|
||||
|
||||
入侵者同时需要函数，数据和短语-如果真是如此，他们可能获得了对你服务器的完整访问，你只能大清洗了。
|
||||
|
||||
这里还有一个数据存储格式的小问题。Mcrypt 以难懂的二进制形式返回加密后的数据，这使得当你将其存储到 MySQL 字段的时候可能出现可怕错误。因此，我们使用 **base64encode()** 和 **base64decode()** 函数转换为和 SQL 兼容的字母格式和检索行。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 破解脚本 ####
|
||||
|
||||
除了实验多种加密方法，你还可以在脚本中添加一些便利。例如，不是每次都提供键和模式，而是在包含的文件中声明为全局常量。
|
||||
|
||||
### 生成随机密码 ###
|
||||
|
||||
随机（但难以猜测）字符串在用户安全中很重要。例如，如果某人丢失了密码并且你使用 MD5 哈希，你不可能，也不希望查找回来。而是应该生成一个安全的随机密码并发送给用户。为了访问你站点的服务，另外一个用于生成随机数字的应用程序会创建有效链接。下面是创建密码的一个函数：
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
function make_password($num_chars) {
|
||||
if ((is_numeric($num_chars)) &&
|
||||
($num_chars > 0) &&
|
||||
(! is_null($num_chars))) {
|
||||
$password = '';
|
||||
$accepted_chars = 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890';
|
||||
// Seed the generator if necessary.
|
||||
srand(((int)((double)microtime()*1000003)) );
|
||||
for ($i=0; $i<=$num_chars; $i++) {
|
||||
$random_number = rand(0, (strlen($accepted_chars) -1));
|
||||
$password .= $accepted_chars[$random_number] ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return $password;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
#### 使用脚本 ####
|
||||
|
||||
**make_password()** 函数返回一个字符串，因此你需要做的就是提供字符串的长度作为参数：
|
||||
|
||||
<?php
|
||||
$fifteen_character_password = make_password(15);
|
||||
?>
|
||||
|
||||
函数按照下面步骤工作：
|
||||
|
||||
- 函数确保 **$num\_chars** 是非零的正整数。
|
||||
- 函数初始化 **$accepted\_chars** 变量为密码可能包含的字符列表。该脚本使用所有小写字母和数字 0 到 9，但你可以使用你喜欢的任何字符集合。
|
||||
- 随机数生成器需要一个种子，从而获得一系列类随机值（PHP 4.2 及之后版本中并不严格要求）。
|
||||
- 函数循环 **$num\_chars** 次，每次迭代生成密码中的一个字符。
|
||||
- 对于每个新字符，脚本查看 **$accepted_chars** 的长度，选择 0 和长度之间的一个数字，然后添加 **$accepted\_chars** 中该数字为索引值的字符到 $password。
|
||||
- 循环结束后，函数返回 **$password**。
|
||||
|
||||
### 许可证 ###
|
||||
|
||||
本篇文章，包括相关的源代码和文件，都是在 [The Code Project Open License (CPOL)][4] 协议下发布。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://www.codeproject.com/Articles/363897/PHP-Security
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[SamarRizvi][a]
|
||||
译者：[ictlyh](https://github.com/ictlyh)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://www.codeproject.com/script/Membership/View.aspx?mid=7483622
|
||||
[1]:http://pixel-apes.com/safehtml/?page=safehtml
|
||||
[2]:http://ha.ckers.org/xss.html
|
||||
[3]:http://namb.la/popular/tech.html
|
||||
[4]:http://www.codeproject.com/info/cpol10.aspx
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
|
||||
在 Linux 中安装 Google 环聊桌面客户端
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
先前，我们已经介绍了如何[在 Linux 中安装 Facebook Messenger][1] 和[WhatsApp 桌面客户端][2]。这些应用都是非官方的应用。今天，我将为你推荐另一款非官方的应用，它就是 [Google 环聊][3]
|
||||
|
||||
当然，你可以在 Web 浏览器中使用 Google 环聊，但相比于此，使用桌面客户端会更加有趣。好奇吗？那就跟着我看看如何 **在 Linux 中安装 Google 环聊** 以及如何使用它把。
|
||||
|
||||
### 在 Linux 中安装 Google 环聊 ###
|
||||
|
||||
我们将使用一个名为 [yakyak][4] 的开源项目，它是一个针对 Linux，Windows 和 OS X 平台的非官方 Google 环聊客户端。我将向你展示如何在 Ubuntu 中使用 yakyak，但我相信在其他的 Linux 发行版本中，你可以使用同样的方法来使用它。在了解如何使用它之前，让我们先看看 yakyak 的主要特点：
|
||||
|
||||
- 发送和接受聊天信息
|
||||
- 创建和更改对话 (重命名, 添加人物)
|
||||
- 离开或删除对话
|
||||
- 桌面提醒通知
|
||||
- 打开或关闭通知
|
||||
- 针对图片上传，支持拖放，复制粘贴或使用上传按钮
|
||||
- Hangupsbot 房间同步(实际的用户图片) (注: 这里翻译不到位，希望改善一下)
|
||||
- 展示行内图片
|
||||
- 历史回放
|
||||
|
||||
听起来不错吧，你可以从下面的链接下载到该软件的安装文件:
|
||||
|
||||
- [下载 Google 环聊客户端 yakyak][5]
|
||||
|
||||
下载的文件是压缩的。解压后，你将看到一个名称类似于 linux-x64 或 linux-x32 的目录，其名称取决于你的系统。进入这个目录，你应该可以看到一个名为 yakyak 的文件。双击这个文件来启动它。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
当然，你需要键入你的 Google 账号来认证。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
一旦你通过认证后，你将看到如下的画面，在这里你可以和你的 Google 联系人进行聊天。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
假如你想看看对话的配置图，你可以选择 `查看-> 展示对话缩略图`
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
当有新的信息时，你将得到桌面提醒。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
### 值得一试吗？ ###
|
||||
|
||||
我让你尝试一下，并决定 **在 Linux 中安装 Google 环聊客户端** 是否值得。若你想要官方的应用，你可以看看这些 [拥有原生 Linux 客户端的即时消息应用程序][6]。不要忘记分享你在 Linux 中使用 Google 环聊的体验。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/install-google-hangouts-linux/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[FSSlc](https://github.com/FSSlc)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://itsfoss.com/facebook-messenger-linux/
|
||||
[2]:http://itsfoss.com/whatsapp-linux-desktop/
|
||||
[3]:http://www.google.com/+/learnmore/hangouts/
|
||||
[4]:https://github.com/yakyak/yakyak
|
||||
[5]:https://github.com/yakyak/yakyak
|
||||
[6]:http://itsfoss.com/best-messaging-apps-linux/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
|
||||
Linux有问必答-- 如何为在Linux中安装兄弟打印机
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
> **提问**: 我有一台兄弟HL-2270DW激光打印机，我想从我的Linux机器上答应文档。我该如何在我的电脑上安装合适的驱动并使用它？
|
||||
|
||||
兄弟牌以买得起的[紧凑型激光打印机][1]而闻名。你可以用低于200美元的价格得到高质量的WiFi/双工激光打印机，而且价格还在下降。最棒的是，它们还提供良好的Linux支持，因此你可以在Linux中下载并安装它们的打印机驱动。我在一年前买了台[HL-2270DW][2]，我对它的性能和可靠性都很满意。
|
||||
|
||||
下面是如何在Linux中安装和配置兄弟打印机驱动。本篇教程中，我会演示安装HL-2270DW激光打印机的USB驱动。首先通过USB线连接你的打印机到Linux上。
|
||||
|
||||
### 准备 ###
|
||||
|
||||
在准备阶段，进入[兄弟官方支持网站][3]，输入你的型号（比如：HL-2270DW）搜索你的兄弟打印机型号。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
进入下面页面后，选择你的Linux平台。对于Debian、Ubuntu或者其他衍生版，选择“Linux (deb)”。对于Fedora、CentOS或者RHEL选择“Linux (rpm)”。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
下一页，你会找到你打印机的LPR驱动和CUPS包装器驱动。前者是命令行驱动后者允许你通过网页管理和配置你的打印机。尤其是基于CUPS的GUI对（本地、远程）打印机维护非常有用。建议你安装这两个驱动。点击“Driver Install Tool”下载安装文件。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
运行安装文件之前，你需要在64位的Linux系统上做另外一件事情。
|
||||
|
||||
因为兄弟打印机驱动是为32位的Linux系统开发的,因此你需要按照下面的方法安装32位的库。
|
||||
|
||||
在早期的Debian(6.0或者更早期)或者Ubuntu（11.04或者更早期），安装下面的包。
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install ia32-libs
|
||||
|
||||
对于已经引入多架构的新的Debian或者Ubuntu而言，你可以安装下面的包：
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install lib32z1 lib32ncurses5
|
||||
|
||||
上面的包代替了ia32-libs包。或者你只需要安装：
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo apt-get install lib32stdc++6
|
||||
|
||||
如果你使用的是基于Red Hat的Linux，你可以安装：
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo yum install glibc.i686
|
||||
|
||||
### 驱动安装 ###
|
||||
|
||||
现在解压下载的驱动文件。
|
||||
|
||||
$ gunzip linux-brprinter-installer-2.0.0-1.gz
|
||||
|
||||
接下来像下面这样运行安装文件。
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo sh ./linux-brprinter-installer-2.0.0-1
|
||||
|
||||
你会被要求输入打印机的型号。输入你打印机的型号，比如“HL-2270DW”。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
同意GPL协议直呼，接受接下来的任何默认问题。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
现在LPR/CUPS打印机驱动已经安装好了。接下来要配置你的打印机了。
|
||||
|
||||
### 打印机配置 ###
|
||||
|
||||
我接下来就要通过基于CUPS的网页管理和配置兄弟打印机了。
|
||||
|
||||
首先验证CUPS守护进程已经启动。
|
||||
|
||||
$ sudo netstat -nap | grep 631
|
||||
|
||||
打开一个浏览器输入http://localhost:631。你会下面的打印机管理界面。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
进入“Administration”选项卡，点击打印机选项下的“Manage Printers”。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
你一定在下面的页面中看到了你的打印机（HL-2270DW）。点击打印机名。
|
||||
|
||||
在下拉菜单“Administration”中，选择“Set As Server Default”。这会设置你的打印机位系统默认打印机。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
当被要求验证时，输入你的Linux登录信息。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
现在基础配置已经基本完成了。为了测试打印，打开任何文档浏览程序（比如：PDF浏览器）并打印。你会看到“HL-2270DW”被列出并被作为默认的打印机设置。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
打印机应该可以工作了。你可以通过CUPS的网页看到打印机状态和管理打印机任务。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://ask.xmodulo.com/install-brother-printer-linux.html
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Dan Nanni][a]
|
||||
译者：[geekpi](https://github.com/geekpi)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://ask.xmodulo.com/author/nanni
|
||||
[1]:http://xmodulo.com/go/brother_printers
|
||||
[2]:http://xmodulo.com/go/hl_2270dw
|
||||
[3]:http://support.brother.com/
|
||||
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
|
||||
如何修复ubuntu 14.04中检测到系统程序错误的问题
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
在过去的几个星期，（几乎）每次都有消息 **Ubuntu 15.04在启动时检测到系统程序错误（system program problem detected on startup in Ubuntu 15.04)** 跑出来“欢迎”我。那时我是直接忽略掉它的，但是这种情况到了某个时刻，它就让人觉得非常烦人了！
|
||||
|
||||
> 检测到系统程序错误(System program problem detected)
|
||||
>
|
||||
> 你想立即报告这个问题吗？
|
||||
>
|
||||
> 
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
我肯定地知道如果你是一个Ubuntu用户，你可能曾经也遇到过这个恼人的弹窗。在本文中，我们将探讨在Ubuntu 14.04和15.04中遇到"检测到系统程序错误(system program problem detected)"时 应该怎么办。
|
||||
### 怎么解决Ubuntu中"检测到系统程序错误"的错误 ###
|
||||
|
||||
#### 那么这个通知到底是关于什么的？ ####
|
||||
|
||||
大体上讲，它是在告知你，你的系统的一部分崩溃了。可别因为“崩溃”这个词而恐慌。这不是一个严重的问题，你的系统还是完完全全可用的。只是在以前的某个时刻某个程序崩溃了，而Ubuntu想让你决定要不要把这个问题报告给开发者，这样他们就能够修复这个问题。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 那么，我们点了“报告错误”的按钮后，它以后就不再显示了？####
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
不，不是的！即使你点了“报告错误”按钮，最后你还是会被一个如下的弹窗再次“欢迎”：
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[对不起，Ubuntu发生了一个内部错误(Sorry, Ubuntu has experienced an internal error)][1]是一个Apport(Apport是Ubuntu中错误信息的收集报告系统,详见Ubuntu Wiki中的Apport篇,译者注)，它将会进一步的打开网页浏览器，然后你可以通过登录或创建[Launchpad][2]帐户来填写一份漏洞（Bug)报告文件。你看,这是一个复杂的过程,它要花整整四步来完成.
|
||||
#### 但是我想帮助开发者，让他们知道这个漏洞啊 !####
|
||||
|
||||
你这样想的确非常地周到体贴,而且这样做也是正确的。但是这样做的话，存在两个问题。第一，存在非常高的概率，这个漏洞已经被报告过了；第二，即使你报告了个这次崩溃，也无法保证你不会再看到它。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 那么，你的意思就是说别报告这次崩溃了？####
|
||||
|
||||
对，也不对。如果你想的话，在你第一次看到它的时候报告它。你可以在上面图片显示的“显示细节（Show Details)”中，查看崩溃的程序。但是如果你总是看到它，或者你不想报告漏洞（Bug)，那么我建议你还是一次性摆脱这个问题吧。
|
||||
### 修复Ubuntu中“检测到系统程序错误”的错误 ###
|
||||
|
||||
这些错误报告被存放在Ubuntu中目录/var/crash中。如果你翻看这个目录的话，应该可以看到有一些以crash结尾的文件。
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
我的建议是删除这些错误报告。打开一个终端，执行下面的命令：
|
||||
|
||||
sudo rm /var/crash/*
|
||||
|
||||
这个操作会删除所有在/var/crash目录下的所有内容。这样你就不会再被这些报告以前程序错误的弹窗所扰。但是如果有一个程序又崩溃了，你就会再次看到“检测到系统程序错误”的错误。你可以再次删除这些报告文件，或者你可以禁用Apport来彻底地摆脱这个错误弹窗。
|
||||
#### 彻底地摆脱Ubuntu中的系统错误弹窗 ####
|
||||
|
||||
如果你这样做，系统中任何程序崩溃时，系统都不会再通知你。如果你想问问我的看法的话，我会说，这不是一件坏事，除非你愿意填写错误报告。如果你不想填写错误报告，那么这些错误通知存不存在都不会有什么区别。
|
||||
|
||||
要禁止Apport，并且彻底地摆脱Ubuntu系统中的程序崩溃报告，打开一个终端，输入以下命令：
|
||||
gksu gedit /etc/default/apport
|
||||
|
||||
这个文件的内容是：
|
||||
|
||||
# set this to 0 to disable apport, or to 1 to enable it
|
||||
# 设置0表示禁用Apportw，或者1开启它。译者注，下同。
|
||||
# you can temporarily override this with
|
||||
# 你可以用下面的命令暂时关闭它：
|
||||
# sudo service apport start force_start=1
|
||||
enabled=1
|
||||
|
||||
把**enabled=1**改为**enabled=0**.保存并关闭文件。完成之后你就再也不会看到弹窗报告错误了。很显然，如果我们想重新开启错误报告功能，只要再打开这个文件，把enabled设置为1就可以了。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 你的有效吗？ ####
|
||||
我希望这篇教程能够帮助你修复Ubuntu 14.04和Ubuntu 15.04中检测到系统程序错误的问题。如果这个小窍门帮你摆脱了这个烦人的问题，请让我知道。
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://itsfoss.com/how-to-fix-system-program-problem-detected-ubuntu/
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Abhishek][a]
|
||||
译者：[XLCYun](https://github.com/XLCYun)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://itsfoss.com/author/abhishek/
|
||||
[1]:http://itsfoss.com/how-to-solve-sorry-ubuntu-12-04-has-experienced-an-internal-error/
|
||||
[2]:https://launchpad.net/
|
||||
149
translated/tech/20150713 How to manage Vim plugins.md
Normal file
149
translated/tech/20150713 How to manage Vim plugins.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
|
||||
|
||||
如何管理Vim插件
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vim是Linux上一个轻量级的通用文本编辑器。虽然它开始时的学习曲线对于一般的Linux用户来说可能很困难，但比起它的好处，这些付出完全是值得的。随着功能的增长，在插件工具的应用下，Vim是完全可定制的。但是，由于它高级的功能配置，你需要花一些时间去了解它的插件系统，然后才能够有效地去个性化定置Vim。幸运的是，我们已经有一些工具能够使我们在使用Vim插件时更加轻松。而我日常所使用的就是Vundle.
|
||||
### 什么是Vundle ###
|
||||
|
||||
[Vundle][1]是一个vim插件管理器，用于支持Vim包。Vundle能让你很简单地实现插件的安装，升级，搜索或者清除。它还能管理你的运行环境并且在标签方面提供帮助。
|
||||
### 安装Vundle ###
|
||||
|
||||
首先，如果你的Linux系统上没有Git的话，先[安装Git][2].
|
||||
|
||||
接着，创建一个目录，Vim的插件将会被下载并且安装在这个目录上。默认情况下，这个目录为~/.vim/bundle。
|
||||
|
||||
$ mkdir -p ~/.vim/bundle
|
||||
|
||||
现在，安装Vundle如下。注意Vundle本身也是一个vim插件。因此我们同样把vundle安装到之前创建的目录~/.vim/bundle下。
|
||||
|
||||
$ git clone https://github.com/gmarik/Vundle.vim.git ~/.vim/bundle/Vundle.vim
|
||||
|
||||
### 配置Vundle ###
|
||||
|
||||
现在配置你的.vimrc文件如下：
|
||||
|
||||
set nocompatible " This is required
|
||||
" 这是被要求的。（译注：中文注释为译者所加，下同。）
|
||||
filetype off " This is required
|
||||
" 这是被要求的。
|
||||
|
||||
" Here you set up the runtime path
|
||||
" 在这里设置你的运行时环境的路径。
|
||||
set rtp+=~/.vim/bundle/Vundle.vim
|
||||
|
||||
" Initialize vundle
|
||||
" 初始化vundle
|
||||
call vundle#begin()
|
||||
|
||||
" This should always be the first
|
||||
" 这一行应该永远放在前面。
|
||||
Plugin 'gmarik/Vundle.vim'
|
||||
|
||||
" This examples are from https://github.com/gmarik/Vundle.vim README
|
||||
" 这个示范来自https://github.com/gmarik/Vundle.vim README
|
||||
Plugin 'tpope/vim-fugitive'
|
||||
|
||||
" Plugin from http://vim-scripts.org/vim/scripts.html
|
||||
" 取自http://vim-scripts.org/vim/scripts.html的插件
|
||||
Plugin 'L9'
|
||||
|
||||
" Git plugin not hosted on GitHub
|
||||
" Git插件，但并不在GitHub上。
|
||||
Plugin 'git://git.wincent.com/command-t.git'
|
||||
|
||||
"git repos on your local machine (i.e. when working on your own plugin)
|
||||
"本地计算机上的Git仓库路径 （例如，当你在开发你自己的插件时）
|
||||
Plugin 'file:///home/gmarik/path/to/plugin'
|
||||
|
||||
" The sparkup vim script is in a subdirectory of this repo called vim.
|
||||
" Pass the path to set the runtimepath properly.
|
||||
" vim脚本sparkup存放在这个名叫vim的仓库下的一个子目录中。
|
||||
" 提交这个路径来正确地设置运行时路径
|
||||
Plugin 'rstacruz/sparkup', {'rtp': 'vim/'}
|
||||
|
||||
" Avoid a name conflict with L9
|
||||
" 避免与L9发生名字上的冲突
|
||||
Plugin 'user/L9', {'name': 'newL9'}
|
||||
|
||||
"Every Plugin should be before this line
|
||||
"所有的插件都应该在这一行之前。
|
||||
call vundle#end() " required 被要求的
|
||||
|
||||
容我简单解释一下上面的设置：默认情况下，Vundle将从github.com或者vim-scripts.org下载和安装vim插件。你也可以改变这个默认行为。
|
||||
|
||||
要从github安装（安装插件，译者注，下同）:
|
||||
Plugin 'user/plugin'
|
||||
|
||||
要从http://vim-scripts.org/vim/scripts.html处安装:
|
||||
Plugin 'plugin_name'
|
||||
|
||||
要从另外一个git仓库中安装:
|
||||
|
||||
Plugin 'git://git.another_repo.com/plugin'
|
||||
|
||||
从本地文件中安装：
|
||||
|
||||
Plugin 'file:///home/user/path/to/plugin'
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
你同样可以定制其它东西，例如你的插件运行时路径，当你自己在编写一个插件时，或者你只是想从其它目录——而不是~/.vim——中加载插件时，这样做就非常有用。
|
||||
|
||||
Plugin 'rstacruz/sparkup', {'rtp': 'another_vim_path/'}
|
||||
|
||||
如果你有同名的插件，你可以重命名你的插件，这样它们就不会发生冲突了。
|
||||
|
||||
Plugin 'user/plugin', {'name': 'newPlugin'}
|
||||
|
||||
### 使用Vum命令 ###
|
||||
一旦你用vundle设置好你的插件，你就可以通过几个vundle命令来安装，升级，搜索插件，或者清除没有用的插件。
|
||||
|
||||
#### 安装一个新的插件 ####
|
||||
|
||||
所有列在你的.vimrc文件中的插件，都会被PluginInstall命令安装。你也可以通递一个插件名给它，来安装某个的特定插件。
|
||||
:PluginInstall
|
||||
:PluginInstall <插件名>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#### 清除没有用的插件 ####
|
||||
|
||||
如果你有任何没有用到的插件,你可以通过PluginClean命令来删除它.
|
||||
:PluginClean
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#### 查找一个插件 ####
|
||||
|
||||
如果你想从提供的插件清单中安装一个插件,搜索功能会很有用
|
||||
:PluginSearch <文本>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
在搜索的时候,你可以在交互式分割窗口中安装,清除,重新搜索或者重新加载插件清单.安装后的插件不会自动加载生效,要使其加载生效,可以将它们添加进你的.vimrc文件中.
|
||||
### 总结 ###
|
||||
|
||||
Vim是一个妙不可言的工具.它不单单是一个能够使你的工作更加顺畅高效的默认文本编辑器,同时它还能够摇身一变,成为现存的几乎任何一门编程语言的IDE.
|
||||
|
||||
注意,有一些网站能帮你找到适合的vim插件.猛击[http://www.vim-scripts.org][3], Github或者 [http://www.vimawesome.com][4] 获取新的脚本或插件.同时记得为你的插件使用帮助供应程序.
|
||||
|
||||
和你最爱的编辑器一起嗨起来吧!
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
via: http://xmodulo.com/manage-vim-plugins.html
|
||||
|
||||
作者：[Christopher Valerio][a]
|
||||
译者：[XLCYun(袖里藏云)](https://github.com/XLCYun)
|
||||
校对：[校对者ID](https://github.com/校对者ID)
|
||||
|
||||
本文由 [LCTT](https://github.com/LCTT/TranslateProject) 原创翻译，[Linux中国](https://linux.cn/) 荣誉推出
|
||||
|
||||
[a]:http://xmodulo.com/author/valerio
|
||||
[1]:https://github.com/VundleVim/Vundle.vim
|
||||
[2]:http://ask.xmodulo.com/install-git-linux.html
|
||||
[3]:http://www.vim-scripts.org/
|
||||
[4]:http://www.vimawesome.com/
|
||||
|
||||
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user